Home

ClearOne 8I User's Manual

1. 267 SNMPMNGRPORT SNMP Manager Notification Port 267 SNMPREADCOMM SNMP Read Community String 267 SNMPWRITECOMM SNMP Write Community String 267 SPEEDDIAL Speed Dial a Number 0 0 0 000 ccc sse e 267 STRING String Execution iiississsssssssssssssssss sess e 267 SYSCHECKS System Checks s 268 SYSRESULT System Check Result 0500 ee a d n 268 TAMODE Telco Adapt Mode anaana es es 269 225 TELCOLVLCTRL Telco RX Level Control Enable 270 TE Telco Enable ner bee Peces de ok E a pd 270 TIMELOCALE Time Locale Settings 0 0 0066s 270 TOUT Time Out Select es o tee eae Yos C od d donet a 270 UD SW Di RET 270 VER us dol wu es Roatan eed Rl s hed 271 226 SERIAL COMMANDS Serial commands are shown in bold followed by the command form and argument details AA Auto Answer Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of auto answer Command Form DEVICE AA Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query
2. eee a a eee eee 13 Product Registration ius ccce sc po ad acted te eae A Bee eee ea ua 13 s ong eek eto e edu e ve eR e ded de de uar D db ERRARE a Berd 13 Operating Regquitemibls osadia aaa ga ddat E ete ew eb eed s aere ds due d dab ae 14 System Requirements sissa sui ai ap i aeaa a a eaaa a a ara A aoe aeaaeae s 14 UNPACKING PUT 15 Controlsand Connections 1x xx va gos dane Bde dot br and heben er ew bris 23 CHAPTER 2 EXPANSION BUS amp LCD PROGRAMMING 30 Expansion BUS sts p Sti eut d 30 D vi IDS PP ILC ese 31 LCD OWeLVIeW s usns atm drach aca re OR RD P sea cada s qoe o don Sent 32 WC DUG 36 LCD Settings dea hee bans 37 LED Macros MENU poene e Ue erede dede Ruta PS 39 LED Preset Ment xs ape trm tepore RR ena hears ie eed ac de oda oa UR 40 CHAPTER 3 CONVERGE CONSOLE PROGRAMMING 41 Installing Converge Console 41 Converge Console OVervieW zx 23442 Eo Ede obs RACER RR Roe Rol a dede d 44 Site File Overview on eee ened teens 49 Connect toa Site P a 52 SILC
3. 53 Wong PPP DH cCrODMTEMTMTLTTMST 58 Config ration Mode OVerVIeW a acd ree EROR C DERE CORO i ln dod p t n Dni od 64 X 65 Channel Tab Overview aas hehehe 77 AEC Acoustic Echo s 81 NO Noise Cancelation seee sia Ee Rr ea dade dob iceberg 84 ucc P 86 AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control 91 Gali eua d aoc uo oon ts s ie UE bu Rion e 93 MIGIMOULSSUINGS PEDEM 97 Line Input Settings x ausa deer PLC chi T V ERES Ea 103 Telco RX SENOS a ode acts ecrit Re trc tente ec ms t ad am AR Rer s 108 Output Settings xxi aere ER Per em Ce RUN SIR ERN den aor 117 TECO TA SeltiligjS 4 22 21 2 d ab Rack d eves o I RAS ol d ld dob o deed 122 Processitig Seltldjs s wah n e ede ode edocet apt ol dign a RR E 128 amp PD 136 labs ocos Societe 140 AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab 144 Weg PC a 147 Gating ae RRR Ma bed ed ERES ree PERS d 151 top e
4. Accessing the Control Tab To access command control press the Control Tab on the Tab Bar in Console Wee Add Comed Modes Servers TTe Os nmm un AEC Parron Mrs corma mro Evert serosa Cui ent mit 99 Convenyei toT 41 5 Pin Sel de Ste twa iod Ura Cate oi Correced BEBEEEBE te Une Commgetdt 0 Dever DO The Control tab of the Console main screen shows a graphical representation of Control Status Port A The pins numbered in blue are user definable command pins the pins numbered in green are status pins Control interface functionality and pin programming are explained in the following sections User Definable Pins The user definable pins provide control via contact closure and status via open collector functions in the unit There are two user definable pins on the B port of every unit The number of user definable pins on the A port varies by model as summarized in the following table Model User Definable Pins User Definable Pins Control Status Port A Control Status Port B 880 16 2 880T 16 2 880TA 16 2 840T 20 2 154 Model User Definable Pins User Definable Pins Control Status Port A Control Status Port B 8i 16 2 TH20 24 2 SR 1212 16 2 SR 1212A 16 2 Default Pin Assignments For default pin assignments for Control Status ports by model refer to Appendix B Contr
5. Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 0 8 ohms Short 1 70 100V Null to query in text PALEN PA Limiter Enable This command changes enables the Limiter on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PALEN Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text PALT PA Limiter Threshold This command sets the Limiter threshold on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PALT Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Float 2 65 00 to 20 00 dB Null to query in text 258 PANGAT PA Noise Gate Activation Timer This command sets the Noise Gate activation timer The noise gate will be activated if the timer conditions are met along with Gate thresholds Command Form DEVICE PANGAT Channel lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 1 16 Minutes Null to query in text PANGEN PA Noise Gate Enabled This command enables noise gating on a PA Channel Command Form DEVICE PANGEN Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J
6. gt set if switch from Low Voltage to Japan because of current gt set if switch from Low Voltage to FCC because of current gt DAA OVL status gt DAA DOD status gt DAA OPD status gt Not used For the network check the box will report if no IP address is set If it is set the box will ping the gateway The message will say the ping failed if it is not returned in 5 s Otherwise the message will report how many seconds it took to return the ping TAMODE Telco Adapt Mode This command selects reports the Telco adapt mode Command Form DEVICE TAMODE Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group il 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Auto 1 Burst Null to query in text 271 TE Telco Enable This command selects reports the hook status Command Form DEVICE TE Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text TELCOLVLCTRL Telco RX Level Control Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of Telco Rx level control Command Form DEVICE TELCOLVLCTRL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query in te
7. 63 darkest Null to query in text LMO Last Mic On Mode This command selects reports last Mic on mode Command Form DEVICE LMO lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 4 G Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 8 Mic 1 8 to be the last mic OxFF in text Last Mic to stay on Null to query in text LOCALNUM Local Number This command sets or reports back the current value of the local number Command Form DEVICE LOCALNUM Channel Number Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 Number String 16 1 16 Chars of 0 9 Null to query in text Units LOCBLDG Location Building This command sets reports the location of the unit Building string Command Form DEVICE LOCBLDG Value Argument Type Size Values Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text Units 246 LOCCITY Location City This command sets reports the location of the unit City string Command Form DEVICE LOCCITY Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCCNTRY Location Country This command sets reports the location country of the unit Command Form DEVICE LOCCNTRY Value Argument Type Size Values Units
8. 67 SW A Crown 48 4 A Crown POC 170 SW N Shure 14 oe JVC XL FZ2586K gt we Kenwood CD 406 i Fates Pioneer M426 d Las Dr 3 VOR Sound Card Amplifier New Report Export import Upload All Devices Download AllDevices lt NOTE Pre defined AV devices created by ClearOne are ReadOnly as indicated in the center pane They cannot be modified or deleted Creating A New AV Device To create a new AV device select the type of device you want to create in the AV Devices Tree then click the New button on the Database Button Bar The configuration options for that type of device appear on the AV Devices Tab in the Center Pane For example the configuration options for a new Video Codec device are shown below AV Devices Objects New nase faac f a Marstocturer Model Price 1000 00 Stereo rout fv Stereo Output 0 162 Name the new device using the Name field Enter other information as needed adjust the configuration controls to optimize device performance and click the Save button to save the changes The new device now appears in the AV Device Tree as shown below NOTE The AV Device Tree is also available when the Unit Tab is selected making all pre defined and custom AV Devices available for Drag and Drop Configuration of a venue Channel Objects Channel objects
9. gt lt gt lt ES gt ES gt lt lt gt lt BS gt lt GMOD GOFF GON RXBOOST RXBSTEN SERECHO X SFTYMUTE X EN DU EN UNUM UNI U ES ES gt ES gt lt ES gt Ba gt Ba lt Ba gt lt Ba gt lt Ba X lt gt lt Bs gt lt Bs gt lt Bs X lt 53 Bs gt lt Bs gt lt Bo lt Bs gt lt E3 gt lt Bs gt lt X lt ES gt lt 29 x ES x gt lt gt ES gt lt ES lt ES lt ES X lt ES gt lt gt ES gt lt ES ES ES gt ES gt ES x x ES gt lt ES x ES x ES x ba x ES x ES x gt lt ES x gt lt gt lt lt gt lt 2X KK KK KKK OX x X 278 SIGGEN X X X X X X X X SIGGENEN X X X X X X X X SIGGENSWEEP X X X X X X X X SIGTOUT X X X X X X X X SLVL X X X X X X X SMTPSRV X X X X X X X X SNMPMNGRIP X X X X X X X X SNMPMNGRPORT X X X X X X X X SNMPREADCOMM X X X X X X X X SNMPWRITECOMM X X X X X X X X SPEEDDIAL X X X X STRING X X X X X X X X SYSCHECKS X X X X X X X X SYSRESULT X X X X X X X X TAMODE X X X X TE X X X X TELCOLVLCTRL X X X X TIMELOCALE X X X X X X X X TOUT X X X X X X X X UID X X X X X X X X VER X X X X X X X X XCGROUP X X X X X X X XCOMPRESS X X X X X X X XCOMPSEL X X X X X X X XDELAY X X X X X X X XDELAYSEL X X X X X X X 279 EN n _ APPENDIX B DEFAULT PINOUTS CONTROL STATUS PORTS Converge Pro 880 Port A Female DB 25 User Definable Control Sta
10. 6 Press Esc until to return to the Settings menu 7 Repeat this process for each device on the E bus network NOTE You can also set Device IDs in the Unit Properties screen in Console when disconnected However DID assignments made in Console must match the DID assignments made using the front panel LCD PROGRAMMING OVERVIEW LCD Programming allows you to make simple configuration adjustments using front panel controls shown below A B C CONVERGE PRO 880TA A USB Type B Port Provides convenient front panel connectivity for laptops computers and other USB devices B Microphone On LEDs These LEDs indicate microphone gate and mute status C LCD Display Shows model number unit name IP address programming menu pages menu options configuration settings and parameter values D Menu Dial Navigates the LCD programming menu and enables you to select modify configuration settings E ESC Button Returns you to the previous screen on the LCD display 32 J Select Button Displays the LCD programming menu and selects the highlighted option LED Bar Meter Displays the audio level of a selected input output processing or fader channel Default meters 880 Output 12 880T Output 12 840T Output 8 8i Mic 1 TH20 Telco Tx SR1212 Output 12 AMP Fault Indicator 880TA SR 12124 Indicates amplifier faults Telco Tx transmit Telco Rx receive LEDs Display transmit receive and mute stat
11. Caller ID Selectable ringers e Increased I O capabilities Two line level inputs and two line level outputs Audio Expansion bus E bus Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC on line inputs to keep gain levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four internal amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control configuration with single command execution 10 Converge Pro SR 1212A The SR1212A is a 12x12 digital matrix mixer that is the ideal solution for sound rein
12. Device IDs LCD Programming Overview LCD Macros Menu Presets Configuration Mode Control Tab Database Channel Objects Matrix Objects Control Objects Drag amp Drop Configuration 150 GATING TAB The Gating tab allows you to create gating groups and assign mic inputs to gating groups Gating group assignments combine individual channel gating configurations created using the Channel Properties Configuration screen When inputs are assigned to a gating group the gating information from the assigned inputs is used to control how the entire mixer behaves The Converge Converge Pro product family excluding the TH20 features four internal gating groups Internal 1 4 and six global gating groups across the expansion bus Global A F Mic inputs are assigned to Global Group A by default If an input is not assigned to a gating group that mic s gating properties are independent and they have no effect on any gating group When gating groups span two or more units global gating groups the settings must be the same for each unit attached to the global gating group NOTE Mic inputs can be assigned to one and only one Gating Group at a time Accessing Gating Groups To access gating groups click the Gating Tab on the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console 8801a1 cvg Add Connect Modes Services TT EC 25 SOBSABSS CaP LL Current Unit H0 ConvergesfOT A00 Ste V
13. Line 1 Line2 User Volume Down Volume Up Mute If you are configuring a Line or User button enter a name for it in the Line or User Name field optional The key selected determines the commands available in the Command drop down lists in the Command section of the screen Command Associated with Function Volume Type DD Command Channel Group Rate Target Press 3 Converge 8407 rane lfi 2 Command zh fos IF z om Status inactive State 4 JI J r For example the commands available for the volume buttons include GAIN MACRO and RAMP When you select a command the configurable parameters for that command appear as shown above For more information on the command editor see Command Editor in the Control Tab topic Select the Type DID device ID and Command from the drop down lists After selecting a command and configuring its parameters press the Apply button to save the button programming To clear a command press the Clear button 204 For some commands such as MACRO the Status section of the command editor becomes active Status controls the LED status indicator for the associated button based on the state conditions entered in the Active State LED on and Inactive State LED off rows of the Status section Command Associsted with Function User Defined Button Type Command Macro Name Press 3 Converge saor 10 macro f E Command ty
14. Site Wide 0 0 N A 1 32 1 255 Oo N A 1 10 N A Pro 840T Channel Range N A 1 8 1 9 9 is the power amp 17 N A 1 4 1 8 O Z I N 5 8 1 8 1 LOG 2 Site Wide 0 0 1 4 1 32 1 255 Pro 8i Channel Range N A 1 12 N A 1 8 N A 1 4 A F 1 8 0 2 I N 9 12 1 8 LOG 2 Site Wide 0 0 N A 1 32 1 255 N A N A N A N A 1 10 N A 880T Channel Range N A 1 12 1 13 13 is the power amp 1 8 N A 1 4 A F 1 8 0 2 I N 9 12 158 LOG 2 Site Wide 0 0 154 1 32 1 255 880TA Channel N A 112 1 8 1 8 1 4 1 4 A F 1 8 O Z I N 9 12 1 8 LOG 2 Site Wide 0 0 N A 1 32 1 255 Alpha Converge Converge Converge Converge Converge Converge Converge Pro TH20 Channel SR 1212 Channel N A 1 12 1 8 N A 1 4 A F 1 8 O Z N 9 12 1 8 LOG 2 Site Wide Converge SR 1212A Channel REINO N A Ee 1 8 1 4 1 4 A F 1 8 O Z N 9 12 1 8 1 LOG 2 Site Wide N A 1 32 1 255 N A N A N A 1 10 1 4 METER TYPE DEFINITIONS TABLE Alpha Numeric Level Position Level Position Level position Level Level Level Position for Mics for Line for Outputs Position for Position for for Faders Inputs Telco TX Telco Rx Post Gain 1 nput level Input level Input level j vel Inpu
15. Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 255 Null to query in text SNMPREADCOMM SNMP Read Community String This command selects reports the SNMP read community string Command Form DEVICE SNMPREADCOMM Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 30 Read Community validation string GET data Null to query in text defaults to public SNMPWRITECOMM SNMP Write Community String This command selects reports the SNMP Write Community String Command Form DEVICE SNMPWRITECOMM Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 30 Write Community validation string SET data Null to query in text Default private SPEEDDIAL Speed Dial a Number This command dials a speed dial number Command Form DEVICE SPEEDDIAL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 1 20 Null to query in text STRING String Execution This command sends the specified string out the serial port Command Form DEVICE STRING ID Argument Type Size Values Units ID Unsigned Integer 4 0 7 Null to query last string in text 269 SYSCHECKS System Checks Initiates the system checks There is no query for this command The System Check integer bits determine which tests are run Each bit set generates a separate SYSRESULT response COMMAND FORM DEVICE SYSCHECKS System Check Argument Type Size Va
16. s eee tei am t Ce a RNC OU a Ed rw pg A RRA 210 Execute PrESEtS 216 APPENDIX A SERIAL COMMAND GUIDE 218 Type ardiDevice DS oni t ru oet er PR tct wf 218 Song PM T 218 Command Eon Desecif9tioft asas a aca nerd t REOR RC Ou e ded ug os o 218 Groups Channels eire ute eb per Erde ea 4a lee ues deca qe e dee E RR 219 Meter Type DetinitlOnS Table aco pde donee ettet etre gle exce aede y eren ac abeo x pde dpa d 220 Senal Command CREE eas di 227 APPENDIX B DEFAULT PINOUTS 280 e o cca t arn s E i evertere dace 280 All Models 9 232 POM ua de Race sh eye e site EC Ee doi Bad Io C ea tines Pape id es 286 APPENDIX C FIRMWARE LOADING PROCEDURE 287 APPENDIX C SPECIFICATIONS 288 ConvergeT rop ca sert be Eee to ORI osos kone 288 Converge Pro BB0M ec uui eR Pr eere ee fud ve re Lat doxes de d a b 290 Converge Progg QTA tous dua te pta nd UR P tc eet e er t e io ene ac d ut 292 GConvergeJroB ADT i oss sarete tmi We MR al feo eode tn A gon 294 Converge Pro BI ient unb eem aha D as tenti idee Ioh 296 CONVERGE PRO Si COFtIIed i ui rura oret RE e RR EUR dns dde ra 297 Converge Pro TH20 css drei or d aded eter redeo ot deed C ERROR S wad 298 COMEC SR LANZ IT 299 CONVERGE SR AeA s a
17. 30 The Post Gain Meter shows the input level after gain adjustments Mute Button Clicking the Mute button toggles muting The default is Off AGC Automatic Gain Control Button AGC _ Clicking the AGC Automatic Gain Control button displays the Channel Property Configuration dialog for the Selected input channel as shown below 104 Channel Property Configuration Input 5 AGC Enable AGC Maximum Gain Target Level RMS Active Gain 18 20 18 X 0 608 T Response Time 100 2080 4060 5040 2000 ms F Threshold RMS 50 40 D Select the Enable AGC checkbox to enable AGC or deselect it to disable AGC For AGC configuration details see AGC Configuration Settings hannel flouting Matrix l ine Inputs The channel routing matrix shows the associated matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel line input 5 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The GB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box Input 9 banding zmdno i o a o 2 pdpo gmdno o dungiamog gt g dungiamog EA XL 0281 o dol o d iaol b dol o ygol sago o 17 901 1 902 A del
18. 4 node filter bank for crossover Delay Block Compressor Limiter Noise Gate for Hiss Control Sound Masking Generator per channel Adaptive Volume Control Multi Channel Control Microphone Processing 4 node filter bank AGC ALC Power Amplifier Channels 4 Amplifier Output 35 Watt into 8 ohm 301 Impedence Selectable 8ohm 70V 100 V THD Noise lt 2 1 3 Power Crosstalk 68dB Expansion Bus Connection CAT 5 RJ45 Mix Minus Structure 18 Audio Buses 6 Gating Buses 8 PA Reference Buses Network 10 100 Auto Switching PC and Network Port HTTP Server Telnet Client SNMP Agent SNTP Client DNS DHCP RS 232 DB 9 9 6k 115k baud 8 1 0 Hardware Flow Control USB 2 0 Compatible Type B connector GPIO DB 25 female A B Inputs Active Low Outputs Open Oollector 40Vdc 40 mA Power 100 240VAC 50 60 Hz 300 Watts maximum Environmental Operating temperature 32 122 degrees F Humidity 15to 80 Mechanical Dimensions 2RU 3 5 Hx 17 25 W x 15 92 D e Weight lt 30 Ibs Compliance EMC FCC Part 15 Class A EMI EN55024 Safety IEC60950 CSA CCC Class 2 Wiring Required 302 E ZEE APPENDIX D COMPLIANCE WARNING The country code must be set correctly in Console to ensure that the unit operates properly when connected to the telco network and that it complies with the country s t
19. 880 1 0 B TH20 2 0 F 840T 3 0 B 8i A 0 B 880T D 0 B 880TA H 0 B SR 1212 G 0 B SR 1212A 0 For example if there are two Converge Pro 880s and 840T in a site the 880s must have unique DIDs They could be assigned DIDs of 0 and 1 respectively while the 840T could be assigned a DID of 0 without any conflicts NOTE You must disconnect from the site in order to set the Device ID Press the Disconnect button on the Button Bar NOTE The DID specified in Console MUST match the DID set for that unit in the LCD Settings Menu Otherwise when you reconnect to the site Console will correctly recognize the unit with the correct DID but it also adds a duplicate unit with the incorrect DID Audio Master Select Slave default or Master from the Audio Master drop down list Audio Master units ignore audio from upstream units in a site as shown in the sample stack below Converge Pro 840T Slave Link Out Link In 4 Converge Pro TH20 Slave Link Out RS 232 control Audio flow is stopped X device 1 Link In y Converge Pro 880 Master Link In 4 Converge Pro 880 DOGMA NO sms Slave Link Out Audio flow is stopped X Link In Converge Pro 840T Master 60 This prevents audio from being received from units above the master unit in a site For example you can configure a site with multiple units for a room combining application where all units ac
20. Converge Console Site1 cnv TT 33 SOBSERED Oa co ge ClearOne lev z Aas N Ome i OM Mae pM Current Unit H0 CONVERGES80TA 0 Ste View Tree View Dm o 4 T v v w x z D 4 t L Converge 5507 Mode Configuration Ste Data Defaut Il Unt Data Defaut Not Connected eset 0 Ste BG0CT Unk CONVERGEBBOTA 0 Device ID 11 In Console click Add on the menu bar The Add menu appears as shown below Add Connect Modes 5 Converge 840 Converge 880 Converge TH20 Converge 8i Converge 880T Converge 581212 Converge 880TA Converge SR1212A Adding Units On the Add menu select the model you want to add to the site The Unit Properties dialog appears as shown below 187 SAT bate Configure the new unit s properties using the General tab Configure the new unit s IP and serial port settings using the Comm tab For more information on configuring unit properties see Unit Properties Post Process 20 Output Level 20 m irum 5 EO Fitter 5 NOM mmm 3 8 ohm 30 30 30 F Press OK to add the unit to the site or Cancel to return to Console The added unit appears on the Site View tab of the Site pane highlighted in orange as shown below NOTE The Status bar at the bottom of the Console window displays the current status of the unit and t
21. For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Site Properties Unit Properties 184 VIEW MENU OVERVIEW The View Menu provides an alternate navigation method for viewing the screens displayed by clicking on the Console Tabs Accessing the View Menu Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Bos TT E 33 On coo ge ClearOne MIC Line Pres 0 N One NOM Mae Pres Output ent Unit Input 1 r em t Output 1 CONVERGESROTA 0 Ste View Tree View cm o o 2 v v w Y 4 t E Converge 59 0 15 de Configuration Ste Data Defaut Unit Data Defaut Not Connected In Console click View on the menu bar The View menu appears as shown below Add Connect Modes Unit View Channel View Matrix View AEC Reference Builder Macro Builder Gating Builder Control Builder Command Strings Event Scheduler Database Builder A bullet indicates the view currently displayed in Console 185 View Menu Options Options available on the View menu include Unit View Channel View Matrix View AEC Reference Builder Macro Builder Gating Builder Control Builder Command Strings Event Scheduler Database Builder 186 ADD MENU The Add Menu allows you to add units to a site using default configuration settings Accessing the Add Menu
22. PASMM PA Sound Mask Mode This command selects reports the sound mask mode on a PA channel Command Form DEVICE PASMM Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Voice Mode 1 Wideband Mode Null to query in text PASMT PA Sound Mask Timer This command selects reports the timer on sound mask signal on a PA channel Command Form DEVICE PASMT lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 1440 24 hours Minutes Null to query in text PATO PA Thermal Overload This indicates if a thermal overload condition is occurring on one of the power amplifier channels This is Read Only and is automatically generated if a overload occurs Command Form DEVICE PATO Bitmap Argument Type Size Values Units Bitmap Hexadecimal 4 31 30 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Fan IC Temp Overload Intake Temp Overload Outlet Temp Overload PBDIAL Dial a PB Entry by Argument This command dials a speed dial number by name There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE PBDIAL lt Channel gt lt Label gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 Label String 16 1 16 chars PHON
23. See Appendix D Compliance AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 900 Converge SR 1212 12x12 Digital Matrix Mixer 300 CONVERGE SR 1212A Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed from from 20 HZ to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22kHz 1 dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max Gain Rs 150 ohm THD Noise lt 02 Dynamic Range gt 105 dB non A weighted Crosstalk 91 db re 20dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Audio Mixer Parameters Number of Open Microphones PA Adaptive Mode First Mic Priority Mode Maximum of Mics Ambient Level Gate Threshold Adjust Off Attenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate Chairman Override 96 Total Microphones per site 6 Global Gating Groups 4 Internal Gating Groups Matrix Mixing Parameters 8 Microphone Analog Inputs 4 Analog Line Inputs 8 Analog Line Outputs 4 Power Amplifier Outputs 18 Expansion Bus in out 8 Processing Blocks Assignable Processing Blocks Filters All Pass Low Pass Low shelving High shelving PEQ Notch Crossovers Compressor Delay up to 250 msec Power Amplifier Output Processing Feedback Elimination w ring cancellation 10 band EQ filter
24. 0 CONVENTIONS This guide uses the following typographic conventions to describe Converge Converge Pro serial command syntax X Parameters enclosed in gt indicate a mandatory parameter X Parameters enclosed in indicate an optional parameter 1 8 Parameters separated by a indicate a range of allowable values 4 7 9 Parameters separated by a indicate a list of allowable values EREF Words in UPPERCASE bold indicate command text Device Indicates the device type and device number on the Expansion Bus It is composed of a device type character and a device ID character COMMAND FORM DESCRIPTION The structure of serial commands is as follows Device Type Device ID Command Values Carriage Return indicates the start of a command line the Carriage Return terminates a command NOTE Serial commands can be either UPPERCASE or lowercase Return values are always in UPPERCASE In order for a command to be recognized by the RS 232 serial port the command must be terminated by a carriage return For example a command to disable mute for Mic Input 5 on a Converge Pro 880 with a Device ID of 2 would have the command line 12 MUTE 5 In this command line 1 the Device Type for Converge 880 2 the Device ID for unit 2 MUTE serial command 5 the channel Value M the channel type Value for mic input channels and 0 the command Value that turns mute off If an asterisk is placed in the De
25. Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB e THD N 0 396 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telephone Noise Cancellation Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Telco Line Echo Cancellation Tail Time 31 ms Null 55 dB nominal Telco Line e RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX A lead supervision provided Telco Set RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX A lead supervision provided Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB Rs 150 0 THD N lt 0 02 Dynamic Range 100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk lt 91 dB re 20 dBu 20 kHz channel to channel Line Inputs 1 2 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Line Outputs 1 2 Push on mini terminal block balanced Impedance 50 kO Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps Category 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length between any two Converge Converge Pro devices Ethernet Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC 10 100 Mbps E
26. M dx oL 2 x dor lt z amp go n 17 0 pogo amp 1g 01 wego N e Y g To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu C Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctril 105 The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is m N m ee hh Oo A0 n NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider Channel Routing Matrix Outputs Processing Faders In the channel routing matrix pressing the button underneath an Output Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel For example clicking on Output 5 displays the routing configuration for output channel 5 as shown below ups sj 2 sj ofr 3nd STP PEP PE ala m m m rm rm m m rmm m mo o REERRERIBBREISESEPZSSEISSISPISPI I hcc 4 Gain Output Level LE NOM i Mute e 5 265 ES This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Output Settings for more information You ca
27. SCREW WASHER ACC KIT RACK DECOR 4EA BLK 680 000 001 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS BLACK 673 017 012 QTY 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY RJ45 RJ45 18 830 150 004 QTY 1 CABLE ASSY TELEPHONE 12FT 830 000 012 QTY 1 CABLE ASSY USB A B TYPE 6FT 830 153 001 QTY 1 CONVERGE pro 1 Converge Pro 840T P N 910 151 840 Washer Kit 680 000 001 Terminal Bl ac ck Connector 12 Position Green 1 67 17 017 212 2 Terminal Block Connector amp 1 P N 673 017 012 d Cord 8 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 18 150 006 P N 830 1 1 Ground P N sd P 1 Terminal B P N 673 C 12 Position Orange 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 allation amp Operation Manual P N 830 153 001 800 151 880 18 19 CONVERGE PRO 1 Converge Pro 8i P N 910 151 810 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006 1 Installation amp Operation Manual P N 800 151 880 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Software amp Documentation CD P N 800 151 881 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 830 153 001 CONVERGE PRO TH20 1 Converge Pro TH20 P N 910 151 820 1 Software amp
28. Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Channel 2 See 4 G in Groups and Channels Null to query in text HOOK Hook Flash This command sends a hook flash There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE HOOK Channel Argument Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 Reserved 2 0 HOOKD Hook Flash Duration This command selects reports the hook flash duration Command Form DEVICE HOOKD Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 50 2000 Ms 245 Multiples of 10 Ms only Null to query in text LABEL Label This selects reports the label of the specific channel or the unit Command Form DEVICE LABEL Channel Group In Out Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 16 17 20 H I J O M G L A F S T R Input Output to Unsigned Integer 2 Groups all but 6 0 Matrix Groups 6 0 output 1 input Label String 20 1 20 characters CLEAR clear the label Null to query in text LCDCONTRAST LCD Contrast This command selects reports the LCD Contrast Setting Command Form DEVICE LCDCONTRAST Value Argument Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 lightest
29. lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 5 7 12 16 17 I J MBL E T Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text NAME Unit Name NETBIOS Name This command sets reports the name of the unit which is also used for its NETBIOS name Command Form DEVICE NAME Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 16 1 15 Characters Null to query in text NCD Noise Cancellation Depth Adjust This command selects reports the depth setting of the Noise Cancellation Command Form DEVICE NCD Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 17 M R Value Unsigned Integer 2 6 15 dB Null to query in text 254 NCSEL Noise Cancellation Select This command selects reports the setting of the Noise Cancellation for each microphone channel Command Form DEVICE NCSEL Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 17 M R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 0n 2 Toggle NLP Non Linear Processing Adjust Null to query in text This command selects reports the setting of non linear processing for each microphone channel Command Form DEVICE NLP Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel
30. than one microphone to gate on at same time but it restricts more than one mic from gating on to the same audio source It does this by determining the audio level received by all mics when the first mic is gated on and then using this audio level as the ambient level for the gating group If First Mic Priority is disabled two or more microphones will usually gate on when only one person speaks r of mics is eight up to a maximum of 96 microphones in E bus linked systems other mics gate off Off gates all mics off when no audio is present For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Mic Input Settings Chann el Tab Overview Mic Gating Expansion Bus Overview 153 CONTROL TAB The Control Tab allows you to configure pin assignments for the user definable pins on Control Status Port A and Control Status Port B All models implement control status using DB 25 pin ports on the back panel and GPIO General Purpose Input Output with active low pull to ground inputs and open collector outputs For details refer to Appendix B and the Control Status Ports section of Appendix D Specifications The control ports enable external devices to access the Converge Converge Pro serial command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and preset changes All devices connected via the E bus can be controlled from a single control status port on any of the devices
31. Accessing Dialer To access the dialer select Dialer from the Services menu press the Dialer d button on the Console Button Bar or press the Dialer button in the Telco Rx or Telco Tx channel screens Converge Console Site1 cnv Fie View Add Connext Modes Services Mew FT ice 33 ENSURES 9u o mew ClearOne H0 CONVERGE S80TA 0 Ste View Tree View jc Eo jl Ite e o 2 T v v w x z D 4 y RE L Converge 80 1A I 193 Using Dialer When using the dialer the date and time number dialed and call status are displayed in the LCD section of the dialer window Placing and Ending Calls To place a call select a number from the Phonebook section of the dialer window or manually enter a number then press the ON OFF hook button You can also access the Phonebook by pressing the PHONEBOOK button To end a call press the ON OFF hook button To redial a number press the REDIAL button Using Line Features Use the FLASH button to access telco and PBX line features Muting Use the MUTE Tx and MUTE Rx buttons to mute the transmit and receive signals respectively when a call is in progress Renulling the Line During conference calls line conditions and other factors can cause divergence in the automatic Telephone Echo Cancellation TEC adaptation process If side tone occurs during a conference call press the RE NULL button to send a short burst of white no
32. Chairman Override on off AGC on off Automatic Level Control on off Auto Gate Manual gate Adaptive Ambient on off Pre AEC channel Mic Line Inputs 1 8 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to 0 dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment Maximum Level 65 dBu to 4 20 dBu Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 12 Push on mini terminal block balanced Impedance lt 50 Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length Ethernet Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port DB 9 female 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 1 15 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible Type B connector CONVERGE PRO 8680 continued Control Status Ports DB 25 female A B 2 Inputs A B active low pull to ground Outputs A B open collector 40 V
33. Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned 2 0 Ring Cycle Ended Integer 1 Ring Cycle Started 264 RINGEREN Audible Ring Enable This command sends reports the use of an audible ring Command Form DEVICE RINGEREN lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query in text RINGERLVL Audible Ring Level This command selects reports the audible ring s level Command Form DEVICE RINGERLVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text RINGERSEL Audible Ring Melody Selection This command sends reports the audible ring melody Command Form DEVICE RINGERSEL Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 Value Unsigned Integer 2 1 3 Null to query in text RINGERTEST Audible Ring Melody Test This command plays the current audible ringer melody This command is executable only There is no query Command Form DEVICE RINGERTEST Channel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 RINGMOD Ring Cadence Mode This command sets the ri
34. ClearOne s unparalleled processing power enables you to use all of these features simultaneously in any combination allowing you to create optimized audio configurations for every environment and application Enhanced expansion bus E bus capabilities connect up to 34 Converge Pro units together and use up to 2 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines in a single Converge Pro installation Increased distance between units up to 200 feet 60 96 meters Graphical user configurable routing matrix allows you to route any input channel to any output processing or fader channel or combination thereof on any Converge Pro unit or across the expansion bus Front panel control of mute and gain for all input and output channels Safety mute button the Console software button bar instantly mutes all outputs ClearOne s DSP Digital Signal Processing technology ensures crystal clear audio between conferencing sites AEC Acoustical Echo Cancellation Enhancements Smoothing filters to reduce artifacts Pre AEC bypass channels Improved AEC adaption and noise suppression algorithms Automated Push to Talk microphone mode with AEC freezing Gain and gating control tracking Cross point gain adjustments Four fader channels Microphone preamp gain control dB coarse gain and 5 dB fine gain increments for improved microphone gain matching AGC Automatic Gain Control algorithm ALC Automatic Level Control algorithm Telephone Hyb
35. Converge Pro unit In the event that you exceed the preset storage space Console will alert you when you try to save the preset You will be asked to reduce the number of cross point changes in the Matrix or reduce the number of Macros in the preset As a general rule you make cross point changes to three fourths of the matrix with up to two macros in a given preset OR you can use up to 255 nested macros for a given preset 180 Exporting Preset Objects Preset objects allow you to save preset configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly apply preset changes and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration To capture the current preset and save it as an object right click anywhere in the center pane of the preset screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu To apply a preset object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Site Pane of Console while in Console is in Preset Mode For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Configuration Mode LCD Presets Menu Controls and Connections Expansion Bus Overview Unit Tab Channel Tab Matrix Tab AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab Gating Tab Control Tab Macro Tab String Tab Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration 181 FILE MENU OVERVIEW File Menu allows you to use Site Files and Print Reports Accessing the File Menu In Console sel
36. Max number of channels in Multi Channel Group divided by 2 Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Group 2 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel See GroupAndChannels Group Rate Signed Integer 2 50 50 dB If value 0 the ramp will stop If value 0 the gain will ramp down If value gt 0 the gain will ramp up Target Signed Integer 2 65 20 dB If NULL in text or 0x80 in binary the ramp will use the channel s maximum and minimum for a target Sec 251 MIN Minimum Gain Setting This command changes or reports back the minimum gain setting for a channel Command Form DEVICE MIN lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 5 7 12 16 17 l J O M P L Value Signed Float 2 65 00 20 00 dB Null to query in text MINMAX Minimum and Maximum Gain Setting This command changes or reports back the minimum and maximum gain setting for a channel Command Form DEVICE MINMAX lt Channel gt Group Min Max Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 5 7 12 16 17 I J M BL F T R Min Signed Float 2 65 00 20 00 dB Null to query in text Max Signed Float 4 65 00 20 00 dB MLINE Mic Line Coarse Gain Setting This command selects reports the setting of coarse gain Command Form DEVICE MLINE lt Channel gt Value Argumen
37. Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCCOMP Location Company This command sets reports the location of the unit Company string Command Form DEVICE LOCCOMP Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCREGION Location Region This command sets reports the location of the unit Region string Command Form DEVICE LOCREGION Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCROOM Location Room This command sets reports the location of the unit Room string Command Form DEVICE LOCROOM Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOCSITENAME Location Site Argument This command sets reports the location of the unit Site name Command Form DEVICE LOCSITENAME Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 64 Characters Null to query in text 247 LOCSTATE Location State This command sets reports the location of the unit State Prefecture string Command Form DEVICE LOCSTATE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 63 Characters Null to query in text LOGMASK Device Log Mask This com
38. Volume Down Output 8 1 dB 16 Y Status Output 17 Status Output Microphone 1 Gate Status 18 N Status Output Microphone 2 Gate Status 19 N Status Output Microphone 3 Gate Status 20 N Status Output Microphone 4 Gate Status 21 M Status Output 22 Y Status Output 23 M Status Output 24 Y Status Output Ring Indication 25 NA NA Ground 282 Converge Pro 8i Port A Female DB 25 User Definable Control Status Default Description Control Input 1 Y 2 Y Status Output 3 M Control Input Mute All Mics Toggle 4 Y Status Output Status of Mute All Mics 5 M Control Input Mute Mic 1 Toggle 6 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 1 T Y Control Input Mute Mic 2 Toggle 8 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 2 9 M Control Input Mute Mic 3 Toggle 10 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 3 11 Y Control Input Mute Mic 4 Toggle 12 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 4 Is Y Control Input Mute Mic 5 Toggle 14 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 5 15 Y Control Input Mute Mic 6 Toggle 16 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mic 6 17 N Status Output Microphone 1 Gate Status 18 N Status Output Microphone 2 Gate Status 19 N Status Output Microphone 3 Gate Status 20 N Status Output Microphone 4 Gate Status gl N Status Output Microphone 5 Gate Status 22 N Status Output Microphone 6 Gate Status 23 N Status Output Microphone 7 Gate Status 24 N Status O
39. in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Line 5 as Podium DVD Played Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below Objects Mic Podium Mic PTT Microphone 2 Podium CD Changer Podium DVD Player E Telco Rx Output B3 Telco Tx Processing Fader A H Optimizing Input Gain Structure Optimizing gain structure for input channels maximizes the signal to noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance Before configuring an input channel ClearOne recommends that you review the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control Mic Gating Gating Tab Matrix Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration Database Tab Mic Input Settings Output Settings 107 TELCO RX SETTINGS Telco Rx Settings enable you to customize telephone receive channel settings using the Channel screen Accessing Telco Rx Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the Telco Rx channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane Converge Console 8801 1 Add Connect Modes Services Boa TT 26 25 SOBSUBE
40. right click anywhere in the center pane of the preset screen and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu To apply a preset object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Site Pane of Console while in Console is in Preset Mode 173 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Database Tab Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco Rx Settings Telco Tx Settings Output Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Matrix Tab Control Tab Macro Tab Preset Mode Overview 174 PRESET MODE Preset Mode allows you to create and modify presets To execute presets Console must be in Configuration Mode There are 32 presets available in Console Presets provide the configuration flexibility needed to meet the challenges of changing conference room requirements These changes include audio routing gating muting levels AEC referencing and signal processing as well as room combining and room configuration Presets allow you to make configuration changes instantaneously without interrupting or affecting any conferences in progress This topic covers Preset Configuration Tabs Creating Presets Executing Presets Preset Execution Flags Preset Control Masking Preset Storage Space Considerations Exporting Preset Objects Accessing Preset Mode To access Preset Mode press the Preset t button on the Console Button Bar or sel
41. 40 VDC max 40 mA each 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software Converge Console Power Input Range Auto Adjusting 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 30W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 17 25 x 10 25 x 1 75 43 8x 26x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 lbs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 C to 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals See Appendix D Compliance AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 881 Converge Pro 880T 8 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer with Telephone Hybrid and 10W Amplifier 291 CONVERGE PRO 880TA Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed from 20 HZ to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22kHz 1 dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max Gain Rs 150 ohm THD Noise lt 02 Dynamic Range gt 105 dB non A weighted Crosstalk 91 db re 20dBu 9 20 kHz channel to channel Audio Mixer Parameters Number of Open Microphones PA Adaptive Mode First Mic Priority Mode Maximum of Mics Ambient Level Gate Threshold Adjust Off Attenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate Chairman Override 96 Total Microphones pe
42. 9 Mbps CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length Ethernet Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port DB 9 female e 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible lype B connector Control Status Ports DB 25 female A B 2 Inputs active low pull to ground Outputs open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software Converge Console Power Input Range Auto Adjusting 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 30W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 17 25 x 10 25 x 1 75 e 43 8 x 26x 4 5 cm CONVERGE PRO 8l CONTINUED Weight 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 105 5 4 kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 10 C to 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals See Appendix D Compliance AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 810 Converge Pro 8i 8 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer no outputs 297 CONVERGE PRO TH20 Telephone Audio Performance
43. Add Connect Modes Services amp mmm ClearOne e une agcReterence macro cating control string Event Scheduler Database SUG r EC a ru UN E Current Unit modb 9 J Output 1 CONVERGESSOTA 0 42 e 000b 5 0 254 0048 Ste View Tree View P 2 T v v w Converge i Unk CONVERGESEOTA O Device ID 201 Using Event Log Captured events appear in the left section of the Event Log window Event Codes and Messages appear in the right section of the window Event Log To print the event log press the Print button To clear the event log press the Clear button and answer Yes to the confirmation dialog that appears For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Services Menu Event Scheduler 202 WEB BUILDER Web Builder consists of User Console and Control Console These consoles allow you to configure a subset of call management and mixing features for access through a web portal integrated into the firmware The web portal can be accessed over IP with Microsoft s Internet Explorer requires IE version 5 5 or later and Sun Microsystems Java Runtime Environment version 6 0 or higher User Console allows you to configure basic call functions including on off hook redial volum
44. Configuration PowerAmp 1 er elay Compressor Fee loi e iter Limiter Multichannel Control Fit Delay C Feedback Noise Gate EG Filter Limit Mulichannel Group1 Enable Adaptive Volume PA Channel Selection 1 2 3 4 Reference Microphone input 1 PA Gain to Ambient Change Ratio fi 1 2 Adaptive Threshold Noise Floor Maximum Gain Adaptive Gain 0 18 18 M Mulichannel Group 2 4 PA Channel Selection 34 E 8 NM 8 8 3 l Volume Indicates the volume level assigned to the Multichannel Group PA Channel Selection Each box represents a PA Channel Check the box you wish to assign to the corresponding Multichannel Group Mute Mutes the Multichannel Group Enable Adaptive Volume When enabled the level of the PA Channel will adjust based on the Noise Floor heard by the selected reference microphone As the level of noise changes the output level adjusts according to the selected PA Gain to Ambient Change Ratio For example if the rate is set to 2 1 the amplifier level will adjust by 2 dB for every 1 dB in noise for increase The gain applied is governed by the Maximum Gain setting Before any gain is applied the noise floor heard by the mic must be equal to or greater than the Adaptive Gain setting
45. Do not attempt to disable this ground connection by using an adaptor or other method 2 Mic Line Inputs Mini terminal push on block connector for any combination of microphone and or line level inputs Converge Pro 880 8 inputs Converge Pro 880T 8 inputs ConvergePro 880TA 8 inputs Converge Pro 840T 4 inputs Converge Pro 8i 8 inputs Converge Pro TH20 0 inputs Converge SR 1212 8 inputs Converge SR 1212A 8 inputs 3 Line Outputs Mini terminal push on connector for line level outputs 880 880T 880TA 840T SR 1212 SR 12124 4 Line Inputs Mini terminal push on block connector for line level inputs only Converge Pro 880 4 inputs Converge Pro 880T 4 inputs Converge Pro 880TA 4 inputs Converge Pro 840T 4 inputs Converge Pro 8i 4 inputs Converge Pro TH20 2 inputs Converge SR 1212 4 inputs Converge SR 1212A 4 inputs 5 Line Outputs Mini terminal push on block connector for line level outputs 880 880T 840T 20 SR1212 27 6 Link In and Link Out Ports Two RJ 45 E bus expansion bus connectors used to connect multiple Converge Pro units together to create a site You can connect up to twelve Converge Pro 840T 880 880T 880TA 8i SR 1212 SR 1212A units up to 16 Converge Pro TH20 units or any combination thereof where the total number of microphone inputs does not exceed 96 Maximum cable length is 200 feet using Category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable WARNING Use the Link In and Link Out ports wi
46. Documentation CD 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 800 151 881 P N 680 000 001 2 1 Terminal Block Connector 6 Position Black P N 673 017 006 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Terminal Block Connector 6 Position Green P N 673 017 016 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006 1 Telephone Cable 12 P N 830 000 012 1 Installation amp Operation Manual 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 800 151 880 P N 830 153 001 20 1 Converge Pro SR1212 P N 910 151 900 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 3 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Black P N 673 017 012 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006 1 Converge Pro Installation amp Operation Manual P N 800 151 880 21 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Converge Pro Software amp Documentation CD P N 800 151 881 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 830 153 001 Converge SR 1212A Packing Contents CONVERGE SR 1212A QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS GREEN SCREW WASHER ACC KIT RACK DECOR 4EA BLK 673 017 212 QTY 1 680 000 001 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS BLACK 673 017 012 QTY 2 CD CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY 800 151 881 QTY 1 PWR CORD MO
47. E mark 1212 Declares that the product s listed above conform s to the following Council Directive s 1999 5 EC Radio equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive Product Standard s to which Conformity of the Council Directive s is declared EMC 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive EN 55022 2006 Emissions Information technology equipment Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement EN 55024 1998 Immunity A1 A2 Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics Limits and methods of measurements EN 61000 3 2 2004 Part 3 Limits Section 2 Limits for harmonic current emissions EN 61000 3 3 2002 Section 3 Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current up to and including 16 A EN 61000 4 2 2001 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity EN 61000 4 3 2002 Radiated RF Immunity EN 61000 4 4 2004 Electrical Fast Transients Immunity EN 61000 4 5 2005 Lightning Surge Immunity EN 61000 4 6 2004 Conducted RF Immunity EN 61000 4 8 1993 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity EN 61000 4 11 2004 Voltage Dips and Voltage Interruptions EN55024 A1 A2 1998 Telecommunication Terminal Equipment Safety 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive LVD IEC 60950 1 2001 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment 305
48. Expansion Bus Signal Generator A device for generating a reference tone for sound system calibration purposes Site File Site Files allow you to store configuration settings for one or more Converge Pro devices including Inputs Outputs Fader channels Processing channels Matrix routing and Presets for a specific application or venue Site files also provide Console with the necessary information to communicate with site hardware using your PC Site Properties The Site Properties window opens when you select New Site from the File menu or click on the New Site button on the Console button bar It allows you to enter information about the site as well as configure the communication and security settings SMTP Simple Mail Transport Protocol Part of the IP protocol suite SMTP servers resolve the DNS address and recipient information used to transport email messages over IP networks See also DNS Subnet Mask A subnet mask defines the range logical IP addresses used for internal network traffic and is used by DHCP gateway devices and routers to distinguish between internal and external network traffic on IP networks See also DHCP Gateway and DNS TERL Telco Echo Return Loss The TERL meter shows the coupling between the transmit signal and the input to the telephone echo canceller It is the ratio of the two levels TERLE Telco Echo Return Loss Enhancement The TERLE meter shows the loss through the telephone echo cancellation proce
49. Gain Max This command sets the target gain for auto setup in feedback cancellation Command Form DEVICE FEG Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 8 dB Null to query in text FEGL Feedback Elimination Gain Level This command reports the gain value achieved at the end of the feedback automatic setup The maximum value possible is set in the FEG command This is a query only command Command Form DEVICE FEGL Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Float 2 99 99 to 99 99 dB Sent with Null value returned FELD Feedback Elimination Lock Depth This command sets the operation of a fixed filter node to be either locked or unlocked In locked mode the fixed filter s depth will remain the same after all the fixed filters are placed In unlocked mode the fixed filter s depth can be modified anytime until the maximum depth is achieved Command Form DEVICE FELD Channel lt Group gt Value 240 Argument Type Size Channel Channel 1 Group Group 1 Value Unsigned Float 2 FEM Feedback Elimination Mode Values See GroupAndChannels 23 J 0 Locked 1 Unlocked Default 0 Null to query in text Units This command set the feedback mode to either Music or Voice This effects how aggressiv
50. Gain Slider The Gain slider adjusts the output gain level To change the value use the slider or selector box Range is from 65 to 20dB in 5dB increments The default is Min Max Limits Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels Output Level Meter Output Level 5 30 Shows the signal level in dB when a signal is present Channel Routing Matrix Outputs The channel routing matrix shows the matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel Output 1 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box You can click directly on any cross point box in the top row to set a parameter as cross point or leave it blank as required for your installation To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu 118 I o Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl C Paste The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Mov
51. In general you should set the Coarse gain slider to 56dB for a mic input 28dB for active equipment that requires an input between mic and line level or for a line level input device Use the Fine gain slider to adjust input volume level You can also set fine gain in 5dB increments using the Up Down buttons or enter a value directly in the field Post Gain Meter m Post Gain The Post Gain Meter displays the audio level after gain adjustments Post Process Meter Post Process The Post Process Meter displays the audio level after it passes through all mic input processing such as Processing channels Filters AEC NC AGC ALC and Mute 98 ost Gate Meter Post Gate The Post Gate Meter displays the audio level after gating Channel gating for mic inputs is configured on the Gating tab of the Channel Property Configuration window for mic input channels which is described in the next section a n si iannel Configuration Buttons The Channel Configuration Buttons enable you to configure the available features for mic input channels With the exception of the Mute button which toggles muting clicking a channel configuration button displays the Channel Property Configuration window Each feature is shown on a tab in the window that corresponds with the configuration button shown in the Center Pane For example clicking the AEC button displays the Channel Property configuratio
52. In the channel routing matrix pressing the button above or below the cross point box for a channel displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel as shown below iit amet eve This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane You can change the label name of the channel in the label entry box You can also change channel configuration settings For example for an output channel you can toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Input 1 to Podium Mic changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console 133 Creating Channel Objects One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring a processing channel using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save a processing channel configuration right click in the processing section of the screen surrounded by an
53. Notch Null to query in text Frequency Unsigned 4 Type 0 0 Null in text Hz Float Type 1 6 8 11 20 00 20000 00 Type 7 500 00 5000 00 Gain Slope Signed Float 2 Type 0 3 7 11 O Null in text dB Type 4 6 15 00 15 00 dB per Type 8 9 12 18 24 Octave Type 10 12 24 Bandwidth Subtype Unsigned 2 Type 0 5 7 0 Null in text Octaves Float Type 6 11 0 05 5 00 Type Type 8 10 2 Low Pass 3 High Pass 242 FILTSEL Filter Select This command turns on and off the filters Command Form DEVICE FILTSEL Channel Group Node Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 5 M P Node Unsigned Integer 1 Group 3 1 4 OxFF for all text Group 5 1 15 OxFF for all text Value Unsigned Integer 1 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text FLOW Flow Control This command selects reports the flow control of the serial port on the unit Hardware flow control is implemented using DTR and DSR Command Form DEVICE FLOW Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text FMP First Mic Priority Mode This command selects reports first Mic priority mode Command Form DEVICE FMP Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 4 Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Nul
54. Open the Channel Tab and select the Output Channel on the Tree View Tab that you want to optimize as shown below Mode Configuration Ste Data Delak Unt Data Defaut Not Connected Ste Unt Convergece0TAQ0 Device ID 0 2 Optimize the gain level for all mic line and telco rx inputs routed to the selected output channel 3 Adjust the Gain Slider until the average level on the Gain Meter matches the nominal level of the next device in the chain 167 4 Repeat the above steps for each output channel in the system For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Configuration Mode Overview Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco Rx Settings Telco Tx Settings Output Settings AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation Filters 168 DRAG AND DROP CONFIGURATION NOTE Objects and Devices created in Console 1 0 4 and 1 1 5 are NOT compatible with Console 2 0 Objects and devices created with these earlier versions will need to be re created Console provides powerful Drag and Drop Configuration capabilities that allow you to quickly configure Converge Converge Pro devices and perform advanced system configuration tasks The types of objects available in Console for drag and drop configuration include AV Devices Channel Objects Matrix Objects Control Objects Macro Objec
55. Preset Mode Preset mode is used to create presets and is accessed from the Console toolbar Processing Blocks Processing blocks enable you to configure filters delay compression and gain to create precise audio configurations for any venue A single input or group of inputs can be routed through a processing block and then routed to an output or multiple outputs There are four processing blocks available for the 840T and eight for the 880 and 8l A D for 840T A H for 880 and 8l See also Filters Delay Compression and Matrix Quality Factor It is the ratio of the center frequency divided by the bandwidth Q reflects an inverse relationship to the bandwidth and is adjustable from 02 1 to 40 1 Ratio The amount of compression applied to the output signal compared with the input signal as the signal exceeds the threshold level See also Compressor Compression and Threshold 314 Release Time Release is a parameter which determines how quickly compression is released after the input signal drops below the specified threshold See also Compressor Compression and Ratio Reverberation A diffused acoustic energy field fed and maintained by sound reflections from the room surfaces S Z Buses These eight buses are line input mixer buses They are used to route auxiliary audio such as from a CD player or VCR to and from other units on the Expansion Bus These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required See also
56. Push on mini terminal block balanced Impedance 50 Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Amplifier Output Binding Post Connection 10 Watts 4 Impedance THD Noise 0 596 Telco Line e RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telco Set RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telephone Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB THD N 0 396 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telco Line Echo Cancellation Tail Time 31 ms Null 55 dB nominal Telephone Noise Cancellation Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Expansion Bus In Out Proprietary Network RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length CONVERGE PRO 840T continued Ethernet Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port DB 9 female e 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible B connector Control Statu
57. Serial Control interactions and Audio Control interactions are not affected by a unit s Control Master designation NOTE All units are Control Slave units by default SNMP In the SNMP section enter the SNMP settings for the site The Control Master nit uses this information to communicate SNMP events including events reported by Control Slave nits NOTE The Installation amp Documentation CD contains SNMP MIB files for each device type for use with third party SNMP management software Email Notifications In the Email Notifications section enter the SMTP Server address in the SMTP Server Address field and the IP address of the server that will receive email notifications in the SMTP Server IP Address field The recipient s email address in the Email Address field 55 User name Passwords In the User name Passwords section click the button for the user type that you want to create The Name Password dialog appears as shown below Admin Name Password New password Confirm new password RRRRRAAK NOTE The default user name is clearone The default password is converge User names and passwords are not case sensitive User access privilege levels are as follows Administrator Full Console and web portal access Manager Web access to Dialer Maintenance Registration About and Help pages User Web access to the Dialer Registration About and Help pages Enter the appropriate user
58. Telecom Telecom Terminal Equipment Converge Pro 840T amp Converge Pro TH20 Only ETSI ES 203 021 1 2 and 3 Access and Terminals AT Harmonized basic attachment requirements for Terminals for connection to analogue interfaces of the Telephone Net works Update of the technical contents of TBR 021 EN 301 437 TBR 015 TBR 017 Part 1 General aspects Part 2 Basic transmission and protection of the network from harm Part 3 Basic Interworking with the Public Telephone Networks 2003 11 EC amp 2002 95 EC RoHS Compliance Directive We herein certify that the Converge Pro 880 8l 840T amp TH20 including all supplied accessories and cables are in compliance with the EU directive 2003 11 EC and EU directive 2002 95 EC We the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Manufacturer Signature Tracy Bathurst Full Name VP of Product Line Management Title Legal Representative in Europe Signature Martin Offwood Full Name Managing Director EMEA North Title Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 95 EC ClearOne is compliant with the WEEE directive For recovery and recycling information visit www clearone com support recycling php content 2 main 306 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE Conformity of the equipment with the guidelines below is attested by the CE mark EC Declaration of Conformity M
59. Value Unsigned Short 2 0 No Filter 1 High Pass 2 Low Pass 3 Hi and Low Pass Null to query in text PANGF PA Noise Gate Filter This command sets either a High Pass or Low Pass filter to be used in the activation of the noise gate This will affect the threshold conditions for activation of the gate A low pass will remove noise floor contributions to gate threshold above 500 HZ A high pass will remove noise floor contribution to gate threshold above below 2K Command Form DEVICE PANGF lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text PANGM PA Noise Gate Mode This command sets the Noise Gate mode to be either manual or automatic In manual mode the gate threshold will be used to activate In auto mode the noise floor will be used to activate Command Form DEVICE PANGM lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Automatic 1 Manual Null to query in text 259 PANGT PA Noise Gate Threshold This command sets the Noise Gate Threshold that will be used when in the manual mode This represents the level at which the noise gate will activate Command Form DEVICE PANGT Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Va
60. allow you to save pre defined configurations for a channel such as an Output channel To access objects select the Objects tab in the center pane The Object Tree appears in the Object Pane on the right side of the screen as shown below Available channel object types include Mic Input Line Input Telco Rx Output Telco Tx 163 Processing Fader Channels To create a new channel object select an object type in the Object Tree and click the New button Enter a name for the object in the Name field adjust the channel configuration controls to optimize channel performance for your application and press the Save button The new channel object appears in the Object Tree along with all other custom channel objects you have created as shown below AV Devices Objects Name PTT Microphone 8 New Delete Export Import Upload All Objects Download All Objects NOTE The Object Tree is also available when either the Unit Tab or the Channel Tab is selected making all custom channel objects you have defined available for Drag and Drop Configuration of a venue Import Export AV Devices and Objects All AV Devices and channel Objects are stored as XPT files and XMO files respectively on the host computer or network To import or export these files use the Import and Export buttons on the Database Button Bar These features enable you to share device and object file definitions across sites
61. and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu To apply a matrix object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the matrix in the Matrix Tab screen Control Objects Control Objects allow you to save control port objects into the Database To capture the currently displayed control pin programming right click in the Control Status Pin Select portion of the Control Tab screen and select Export as Object from the shortcut menu After saving the control port object it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console To apply a control object after saving it to the database drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Control Status Pin Select portion of the Control Tab screen Macro Objects Macro Objects allow you to save macros into the Database and reuse them To capture a macro and save it as an object right click anywhere in the center pane of the macro screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu After saving a macro as an object it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console To use a macro object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop it onto the Macro Command List portion of the Macro Tab screen Preset Objects Preset Objects allow you to save preset configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly apply preset changes and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration To capture the current preset and save it as an object
62. behavior is controlled by the settings described in the next section Manual Gating Settings Hold Time Determines how long the channel stays gated on after the channel is manually gated off The hold time range is from 1 to 8 0 seconds The default is 3 seconds Off Attenuation Sets the amount of level reduction applied to a channel when it is manually gated off The range is from to 50cB The default is 12dB Decay Rate Determines how fast a channel gates off after the Hold Time expires The default is Medium NOTE Changing Hold Time Off Attenuation and Decay Rate also changes the same settings under Auto Gating Both Auto Gating and Manual Gating are affected by Gating Group membership as described in the next section Gating Groups In addition to specifying gating characteristics for each Mic Input channel you can assign the channel to a Gating Group for greater flexibility and control When inputs are assigned to a gating group the gating information from the inputs is used to control how the entire mixer behaves Gating Groups are created and defined using the Gating Tab on the Tab Bar in Console The 880 880T 880TA 8407 8i SR 1212 and SR 1212A feature four internal gating groups Internal 1 4 and four global gating groups across the expansion bus Global A F Mic Inputs can only be used in one gating group at a time If an input is not assigned to a gating group that mic s gating properties are independent and
63. consult your telephone company or a qualified installer ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY This equipment uses AC power which can subjected to electrical surges typically lightning transients which are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources The warranty for this equipment does not cover damage caused by electrical surge or lightning transients To reduce the risk of this equipment becoming damaged it is suggested that the customer consider installing a surge arrestor IC COMPLIANCE IC 1970A CONVPRO Ringer Equivalence Number REN 0 0B ac NOTICE The term IC before the certification registration number signifies that Industry of Canada technical specifications were met This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to obtain the maximum RENS for the calling area The REN for this product is listed above Before installi
64. disconnect unit power from the AC mains disconnect the unit s power cord from the mains Socket To reconnect power plug the unit s power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines 18 Caution Danger of explosion if lithium battery is incorrectly displaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type Battery should only be replaced by qualified personnel and is not intended as a user serviceable part Do not expose batteries or battery pack to excessive heat such as prolonged sunlight fire or other heat sources 19 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock 20 This product can interfere with electrical equipment such as tape recorders TV sets radios computers and microwave ovens if placed in close proximity 21 Class 2 Wiring IS REQUIRED for these devices Wiring and install should only be performed by qualified personnel ONO OS ONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN AVIS RISQUE DE CHOC THE LIGHTNING ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR THE EXCLAMATION WARNING TO FLASHAND ARROW POINT WITHIN THE CAUTION TO REDUCE THE PREVENT FRE OR TERT ELECTRICAL SHOCK warnnesicn ORBACKJNOUSER ALERTING YOUOF HAZARD DO _ ALERTING YOUOF SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE IMPORTANT DANGEROUS REFER SERVICING TO INSTRUCTIONS EXPOSE THIS VOL
65. ex entree o dr eee e EP Ee ege 253 OFFA Off Attenuation 25 20 08 ease obe UR EA REEL OREL ERE 254 PAA PA Adaptive MO ert o Aa wa ad obedece deed p 254 PACEN Softclipper Enable s 254 PAENERGY PA Energy saver mode 254 PAEQEN PA EQ Filter e 255 224 PAEQRST PA EQ Filter Reset ede Ree pp bonnes ec pole rat d 255 PAEQSET PA EQ Filter Set isse iet ete age bigs E HERE ER awed EE it ua dd 255 PAFLT PA Falt etuer eae Phe dad ebd aegra eerte patas 256 PBDIAL Dial a PB Entry by Argument socio EO HER ree e a Ies ese C e Y 259 PHONEBOOKADD Adds an Entry to the Phonebook 259 PHONEBOOKONT Counts Entries the 260 PHONEBOOKDEL Deletes an Entry in the Phonebook 260 PHONEBOOKREAD Queries the Phonebook by Index 260 PP Phantom POWOL uut ice a du o rues Lace obit mode eterna doa batte 260 PRESET Preset Execution Reporting eee 260 PRGSTHING Program String hne Di bietet ye dde ode eto bet e E o rte t 261 PTTTHRESHOLD Push to Talk Threshold issues eese 261 PUSHTOTALK Push to Talk es y pne RR eee S dc abe e
66. for the channel in real time 119 NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Input 1 to Ceiling Mic changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console Creating Channel Objects One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Export as object Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Mic 1 as Podium Mid Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displ
67. gt Reserved Null to query in text Bit Map of 2 XXXX Outputs EV gt Output 1 Isb to 13 msb gt Reserved Bit Map of 2 XXXX Processors gt Processor A Isb to H msb gt Reserved Bit Map of 1 Faders gt Faders 1 Isb to 4 msb gt Reserved Bit Map of Telco 1 XXXX XXXX gt Telco RX gt Telco TX gt Reserved AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of Acoustic Echo Canceller Command Form DEVICE AEC Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text AGC Automatic Gain Control This command selects reports the setting of automatic gain control Command Form DEVICE AGC lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 3 7 l M L Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text 229 AGCSET Automatic Gain Control Adjust This command selects reports the settings of the Automatic Gain Control Command Form DEVICE AGCSET Channel Group Threshold Target Attack Gain Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group
68. in text AAMB Adaptive Ambient Mode This command selects reports the setting of adaptive ambient Command Form DEVICE AAMB lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 toggle Null to query in text AARINGS Number of Rings to Auto Answer On This command selects reports the setting of the number of rings to auto answer Command Form DEVICE AARINGS Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 2 4 Null to query in text ACONN Audible Connect Disconnect Indication This command selects reports the status of the audible connect disconnect indication Command Form DEVICE ACONN lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text 227 ACONNLVL Audible Connect Disconnect Level This command selects reports the audible connect disconnect indicator s level Command Form DEVICE ACONNLVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text AD Auto Disconnect Enable Disable This command selects reports the setting of auto
69. in the Macro Command List Macro Command List Line Number EH 10 Ag4 AgS Ag Arg 1 1 0 RAP 1 F 3 20 _ omes i se seve NOTE When there are multiple commands in the Macro Command List you can drag and drop them to change their execution order You can now add another command repeat steps 4 through 6 or click Save or Save As to save the completed macro Modifying Macros Use the following procedure to edit a macro Select the Macro number to modify from the Macro drop down list Click Change Name to change the macro name optional Double click the command line in the Macro Command List you want to edit Modify the command or its arguments by selecting options from the drop down lists Click Replace to overwrite the old command line with the new changes Click Insert to insert a new command or Delete to delete the currently highlighted command When you are finished making changes click Save or Save As to save the macro Deleting Macros Use the following procedure to delete a macro 1 Click Clear Macro to delete the entire macro 2 Click Delete to delete the selected command line Adding and Inserting Command Lines Use the following procedure to add or insert command lines into the currently selected macro 1 Click Add to place the current command line into the next available row in the command line table 2 Click Insert to insert the current command line into the row dire
70. information and press OK to save the user information or Cancel to return to the Site Properties dialog Site Properties Time Local Tab The Time Local tab enables you to configure time settings and specify location information as shown below As shown below you can set the date and time manually synchronize the time with a PC or use network time servers Site Properties Board Room General Management TimeiLocal Current Ste sf 4 7 Time Server 1 Time Server 2 Network Time 10 101 24135 o000 Tine Zore Use Daylight Savings GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada 56 In the Time section of the tab select Local Time or Network Time for the clock synchronization source When Local Time is selected the Apply button is activated pressing it updates the date and time on all units in the current site When Network Time is selected you must enter the IP address es for the time synchronization server s The date and time is updated for all units in the site when you press the OK button and it is automatically synchronized with the specified server s Enter location information in the Location section of the tab optional Press OK to save the site file or Cancel to close the Site Properties window For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Site File Overview Connect To A Site Unit Properties Conf
71. is 57600 The default for Flow Control is Hardware The default for Serial Echo is On When you are finished configuring unit properties click OK to save the changes or Cancel to close the Unit Properties window AMX Duet Mode Sets a beacon to signify the device is AMX compatible and looks for new or updated modules on the AMX Web Site If new or updated modules are available the user will be prompted to download the module 62 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics LCD Programming Overview LCD Settings Menu Site File Overview Site Properties Connect To A Site Preset Mode Overview Controls amp Connections Serial Control SNMP Control 63 CONFIGURATION MODE OVERVIEW Converge Console has two modes Configuration Mode default and Preset Mode Configuration Mode enables you to perform advanced configuration of devices to customize them to your specific application Accessing Configuration Mode Console automatically starts in Configuration Mode with the Unit tab displayed as shown below MORAN FRE Wd a gt L fem tom i fen S e z E o La 9 t y Y Li Tee CREME I i ETT NUIT R1 You can switch between modes by clicking on the Mode 27 t buttons on the Button Bar For a description of the Console screen components while in Configuration Mode see Navig
72. masking in courtroom clergy and corporate applications NOTE When the signal generator is on for any unit in the site the Signal Generator LED on the Console Button Bar flashes green Debug Console HO ConvergeGB0TADO Channel 1 Signal On Signal Timeout 0 no timeout HO Conwerge amp S0TADO j 1 lt input t Test Signal Types The signal generator provides three types of test signals Pink White and Tone Pink Noise A test signal containing all the frequencies in a given audio spectrum with equal energy in each octave Pink noise is the default signal White Noise A test signal with equal energy distribution throughout a given frequency range Tone A sine wave test signal with less than 0396 distortion Selecting Tone with the Signal Selection slider activates the Frequency configuration section of the tab Linear Sweep Sine Wave A test signal increasing in frequency using predefined steps Log Sweep Sine Wave A test signal increasing in frequency using exponential steps rises on a curve Running a Signal Test Use the following procedure to run a signal test 1 2 e c B Select the unit and channel to test using the unit and channel drop down lists Select the type of test tone using the Signal Selection slider Select the amplitude volume of the test tone using the Amplitude slider The amplitude range is from 60 to 208GB The default is 20dB Set t
73. mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 12 Push on mini terminal block balanced Impedance lt 50 Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps Category 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length between any two Converge Converge Pro devices Ethernet Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port DB 9 female 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible Type B connector Control Status Ports DB 25 female A B 2 Inputs active low pull to ground Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software Converge Console Power Input Range Auto Adjusting 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 30W Typical CONVERGE SR 1212 continued Dimensions L x D x H 17 25 x 10 25 x 1 75 e 43 8 x 26x 4 5 cm Weight 7 51bs 3 3375 kg unit weight 12 lbs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature 14 F 10 C to 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals
74. more information see the Site File Overview topic Accessing Site Properties To access the Site Properties window select the File menu in Console or right click anywhere in the Site View or Tree View panes and select Site Properties from the shortcut menu Converge Console Site1 cnv View Add Connect Modes Services Help Bom 35 On m ClearOne nu LAM IE EIN r HC Maan Ome Ns Ga Cupit Current Unit input 1 am Output 1 CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View MPI Converge 5 90 1 o 2 T v v w Y 1 t L Mode Configuration Ste Data Defaut Unit Data Defaut Not Connected The File menu appears Select Site Properties as shown below 53 View Add Connec New Site Open Site Close Site Save Save As Print 1 Board Room cvg 2 Sitel cvg 3 Site4 cvg 4 Site2 cvg Exit The Site Properties window appears with the General tab selected Site Properties Board Room Create A New Site To create a new site select New Site from the File menu or by clicking the New Site button on the Console Button Bar The Site Properties window appears NOTE You must have administrator privileges to connect to units with Console and to modify user names and passwords User names and passwords are not case sensitive Site Properties are described in the following sections b Site Properti
75. off Last On leaves the last mic activated gated on until another mic gates on The Input options allow you to select which mic remains on when all other mics gate off Off gates all mics off when no audio is present All allows all mics to gate on at the same time Global Gating Groups Gating Groups Group Name Froma fons font First Mic Pricety jv v v v L4 L4 Global gating groups control mic inputs connected to all units linked together through the Expansion Bus Configure Global Gating Group settings as follows Enter a name in the Group Name field optional Select the First Mic Priority checkbox to enable this feature default or deselect it to turn First Mic Priority off NOTE ClearOne recommends using First Mic Priority to maintain maximum audio intelligibility by allowing only one mic to gate on to a participant s voice First Mic Priority allows more 152 Select the Max of Mics from the drop down list the default is 4 This sets the maximum number of hones that can be gated on at any one time within a gating group Again the maximum number of limited to the number of mics included in the gating group For global gating groups the maximum Select the Last Mic Mode from the drop down list the default is off Last On leaves the last mic activated gated on until another mic gates on The Input options allow you to select which mic remains on when all microp mics is numbe
76. one channel compresses all compressors in the group compress together A compressor group must be configured for a single unit a group cannot control compressors from multiple units Post Compressor Gain Adjust the compressor gain with the slider or by using the Up Down arrow buttons The graph reflects the input output decibel levels with the gain ratio and threshold settings you select Threshold Determines the RMS level at which the compressor begins to operate The range is from 30 to 20dBu The default is OdBu Ratio Changes the rate of compression applied to the input signal as the signal exceeds the threshold level The range is 1 1 to 1 20dB The default is 1 1 Attack Sets the time increment used to reduce the signal from input level to the prescribed output level when the threshold is exceeded The range is 1 100ms in 5ms steps The default is 10ms Release Sets the time increment used to restore the signal to the input level when the signal drops below the threshold The range is 100ms to 2 seconds in 5ms increments The default is 500ms 131 Input Meter Shows the level of the signal as it enters the compressor Compression Meter Shows the instantaneous compression value at a given time Gain Slider amp Process Meter Process 30 Meter es Gain rr me Use the Gain Slider to establish the gain level for this processing channel Range is 65 to 20dB The Process Meter shows th
77. participants hear unnecessary pops and clicks Console eliminates these shortcomings through Preset Control Masking which provides the following advantages Automatic preset masking control when room dividers are wired to Control port B pins Manual preset masking control via serial commands Volume levels and mute states are reset only in sections that change Unaffected room sections do not lose custom settings Participants in unaffected room sections do not hear pops and clicks To use preset control masking click on the Preset Mask Control Status B boxes located in the Site Pane while Console is in preset mode to set the pin states High L Low required to trigger preset execution You can use a pin state or combination of pin states to define when a preset will execute Preset Mask Control Status HL 135 7 9 11121617 19 A typical use for preset masking is room combining application that uses automatic partitions with sensors that set the pin to high when a partition is open and to low when a partition is closed For example if Pin 1 is connected to a first partition and Pin 3 is connected to a second partition then the preset mask control status B settings shown above would activate the preset when the first partition is open and the second partition is closed Preset Storage Space Considerations In most preset configuration scenarios it is unlikely that you would reach the storage capacity of a Converge
78. returns to the RS 232 sub menu Flow Control Hardware All models use the RTS and CTS pins on the RS 232 port to regulate the transmission and reception of data You can enable or disable flow control on the front panel and set the flow control type in the Unit Properties window in Console If you select On default from the front panel LCD menu select Hardware as the flow control type in the Unit Properties window If you disable flow control on the front panel select None in the Unit Properties window When None is selected the unit ignores flow control and the relies on the connected external control device to ensure data is not lost NOTE ClearOne recommends that you leave Flow Control enabled and connect all DB9 pins to avoid communication errors Network The Network submenu displays the unit name IP address Gateway and Subnet Mask settings for the unit You cannot change any of these settings from the Network submenu Use the Unit Properties screen in Console to change these settings DID The DID submenu allows you to select a Device ID for the unit Select the DID you want to use press the Select button Answer Yes to the prompt to change the DID or No to keep the existing setting You can also use the General tab of the Unit Properties screen in Console to change this setting when disconnected from the unit However DID assignments made in Console must match DID assignments made using the front panel Default Def
79. s dno o o 2mdno amino dung i p X1 031 o dao o d oL og ol 2 yego gt Six o 1g oL 4 ng ol p dg oo lt t dx o1 gt xg 01 A dor 17 0 0 xd oy 1730 weg oy 9 01 y gt g Em zd oL n For telco rx channels Outputs 5 8 Speaker and To Exp Bus S are selected as cross points by default You can click directly on any cross point box in the top row to a cross point routing path or leave it blank as required for your installation To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Pm Cross Point Enter MJ Copy Paste Ctrl C Ctrl V 114 The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is m N m ee hh Oo A0 n NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider In the channel routing matrix pressing the button underneath an Output Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that output channel as shown below mn S280 L 1 5 107 lt ee Eee un d gt SiGe eo er
80. select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl 124 The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider Channel Routing Matrix Inputs Processing Faders In the channel routing matrix pressing the button above an Input Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for the channel as shown below Gain Post Gain Post Process Post Gate 36 50 Post Gain Output Level 20 20 20 Telco Tx 1 E Telco TX NOM ids E PAN 5 G E Dialer Limiter E 30 30 f This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Processing Settings and Fader Settings for more information You can change the label name of the channel in the Telco Tx entry box toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button to mute or un mute the channel and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time NOTE Changes to channel configura
81. signal flow diagram for the telco tx channel real time peak level meters as well as the channel routing matrix which shows the audio routing configuration for the channel Configuration settings for the telco tx channel are displayed as controls buttons sliders etc which are located at the appropriate stage in the signal flow The following sections describe how to use these controls to configure telco transmit settings for your installation Channel Label Telco Tx 1 Telco TX d Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced Dialer Button The Dialer button opens the telephone dialer shown below allowing you to place calls to establish a conference call with a remote location 122 See Dialer for more information on using the dialer and its features NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Level siis Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics When using NOM over the expansion bus only R Buses support passing NOM information The default is On Mute Button Li Clicking the Mute button toggles muting The default is Off Gain Slider The Gain slider adjusts the output gain level To ch
82. software assumes a preset execution flag value of 2 meaning that the preset executes and its execution state is set to off Executing Presets Using the LCD Preset Menu Press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Presets and press the Select button The Preset Menu appears as shown below NOTE When executing presets from the LCD Preset menu Console assumes a preset execution flag value of 2 meaning that the preset executes and its execution state is set to off Use the following procedure to execute presets from the front panel LCD display 1 Use the Menu Dial to highlight the preset you want to execute 2 Press the Select button 3 Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected preset or No to cancel Executing Presets Using Control Programming Use the PRESET serial command in the Active Low Command or Inactive High Command fields in the Control Pin State section of the Control Tab To execute multiple presets when a control condition is met use the MACRO command to call a macro with multiple PRESET commands embedded as explained in the next section For more information on PRESET and the complete Converge Converge Pro serial command set refer to Appendix A Serial Commands 179 Executing Presets Using Macros Use the PRESET serial command to execute presets in a macro To run multiple presets at the same time use multiple PRESET commands in the macro Macros can be executed f
83. 0 dBu Amplifier Output Binding Post Connection 10 Watts 4 O Impedance THD Noise 0 596 Telco Line e RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telco Set e RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog extension from a PBX e A lead supervision provided Telephone Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled e Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB THD N 0 396 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telco Line Echo Cancellation Tail Time 31 ms Null 55 dB nominal Telephone Noise Cancellation Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Expansion Bus In Out Proprietary Network e RJ 45 2 1 9 Mbps CAT 5 twisted pair cable 200 maximum cable length CONVERGE PRO 880T continued Ethernet Autoswitching with Quality of Connection QoC 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Network Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port e RJ 45 Connectors RS 232 Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port DB 9 female e 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible B connector Control Status Ports DB 25 female A B 2 Inputs A B active low pull to ground Outputs A B open collector
84. 00 001 3 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Black P N 673 017 012 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 jsp Power Cord 8 1 Converge Pro Software amp Documentation CD P N 699 150 006 P N 800 151 881 1 Converge Pro Installation amp Operation Manual 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 800 151 880 P N 830 153 001 15 1 Converge Pro 880T P N 910 151 881 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 3 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Black P N 673 017 012 2 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Orange P N 673 017 112 1 Grounded Power Cord 8 P N 699 150 006 1 Converge Pro Installation amp Operation Manual P N 800 151 880 16 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 000 001 1 RJ 45 RJ 45 Patch Cable 18 P N 830 150 004 1 Converge Pro Software amp Documentation CD P N 800 151 881 1 USB Type A to Type B Cable 6 P N 830 153 001 Converge Pro 880TA Packing Contents Uv CONVERGE 880TA 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS GREEN 673 017 212 QTY 1 CD CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY 800 151 881 QTY 1 PWR CORD MOLDED 6 BLK 3 COND 699 150 006 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS ORANGE 673 017 112 QTY 2 4 MANUAL CONVERGE 840T 800 151 880 QTY 1 17
85. 0T Output 8 8i Mic 1 TH20 Telco Tx SR1212 Output 12 AMP Fault Indicator LEDs 880TA SR 12124 Indicates amplifier faults 1 4 indicates clip 5 indicates thermal overload 6 indicates fault 7 indicates fan on off Amplifier On Off Switch 880TA SR 1212A Turns power to the amplifiers on or off NOTE 880TA SR 1212A This does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains To disconnect unit power from the mains disconnect the unit s power cord from the mains socket To reconnect power plug the unit s power cord into the mains socket following all safety instructions and guidelines Telco On Off Button amp LEDs The button connects disconnects the telephone line attached to the device and the LEDs indicate the connection status of the attached telephone line 840T TH20 880T 880TA 25 Converge Pro Rear Panels Converge Pro 880 Rear Panel VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz LINKOUT CONTROL STATU 10 12 Converge Pro 840T Rear Panel VOLTAGE RANGE 100 240 VAC 2A FREQUENCY 50Hz 60Hz 26 Converge Pro TH20 Rear Panel 10 11 Converge Pro SR1212A Rear Panel 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 12 Converge Pro Rear Panel Connectors 1 AC Power IEC connector 100 240VAC auto adjusting 50 60Hz This equipment must be connected to AC mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection The third prong of this connector ground is an important safety feature
86. 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 Soft 2 Medium 3 Aggressive Null to query in text NOM Number of Open Microphones Mode This command selects reports the setting of Number of Open Microphones NOM on output channels Command Form DEVICE NOM Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 2 16 J O T Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text NTPSRV NTP Network Time Server Address This command selects reports the IP addresses of the NTP Time Server the unit s NTP client requests time status from Command Form DEVICE NTPSRV Value 1 Value 2 Argument Type Size Values Units Value 1 IP Address 4 Null to query in text Value 2 IP Address 4 NULL Null the Telephone Line This command nulls the telephone line There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE NULL lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R 255 Reserved 2 0 OFFA Off Attenuation Mode This command selects reports the off attenuation value of a Mic channel Command Form DEVICE OFFA Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned 2 0 00 60 00 Float Null to query in text PAA PA Adaptive Mode This command selects repo
87. 100V terminals Channel 1 GND or Common speaker lead connects to amplifier s channel 1 GND terminal Repeat this procedure for each channel Y Y Y NER Jos Y 5 PY 8817 ING CHNL 1 CHNL 2 CHNL 3 CHNL 4 70V 100V 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND ING CHNL 4 CHNL 2 CHNL 3 CHNL 4 7oV 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 70V 100V GND 2977773777777 29 m CHAPTER 2 EXPANSION BUS amp LCD PROGRAMMING EXPANSION BUS The Expansion Bus E bus allows you to connect multiple Converge Converge Pro units together to create powerful audio and conferencing solutions for any size venue The E bus is a proprietary digital audio bus that provides control and audio data links between devices Expansion Bus Connections Using the E bus Link In and Link Out ports you can connect up to 34 Converge Pro 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i and Converge SR 1212 SR 1212A units and up to 16 Converge Pro TH20 units where the total number of microphone inputs does not exceed 96 Connect units in daisy chain fashion as shown below using the 18 straight through patch cable included with each unit Part 830 150 004 For larger distances between units use CAT 5 twisted pair cable with RJ 45 connectors The maximum cable length between connected units is 200 feet 61 meters Converge Pro 840T Converge Pro 880 Link In SS oe Audio and Control Buses The E bus allows audio routi
88. 2 kHz 1dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 22 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q e THD N lt 0 02 Dynamic Range gt 100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk 91 dB re 20 dBu 9 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features Number of Open Microphones NOM PA Adaptive Mode First Mic Priority Mode Last Mic Mode Maximum of Mics Mode Ambient Level Gate Threshold Adjust Off Attenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features 36x36 matrix 12analog in out 12 expansion bus in out 8 assignable processing blocks in out 4 assignable fader blocks in out Assignable Processing Blocks Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley Compressor Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration Input Gain Adjust Micor Line Level Phantom Power on off Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off Chairman Override on off AGC on off Automatic Level Control on off Auto Gate Manual gate Adaptive Ambient on off 299 Mic Line Inputs 1 8 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to 0 dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment Maximum Level 65 dBu to 20 dBu Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 Push on
89. 212 SR 1212A Select the check box es for the mic input channels that you want to test Unit Specifies the unit that will provide test audio to the speaker Output Channel Specifies the output channel that will provide test audio to the speaker PA Temp Define PA Fault Define Select the tests you want to run using the Use in test check boxes and select the unit s and output s with 214 speakers connected using the Unit and Output Channel drop down lists Execute the selected tests by pressing the Start button on the System Checks tab Sound Masking Tab ADD INFO Sound Masking is an Amplifier Out only feature consisting of three modes Off Disables the feature Voice Masking operates only in the range usually used when the target audio is vocal Wideband Masking operates throughout the audible range of the unit For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Device Log Event Log Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco Rx Settings Telco Tx Settings Output Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Matrix Tab 215 EXECUTE PRESETS The Execute Presets command on the Services menu allows you to run presets while Console is in Configuration Mode NOTE This command is not available while Console is in Preset Mode Accessing Execute Presets Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connect Modes Servic
90. 4 Follow the instructions that appear on screen to complete installation 15 When Console installation is complete the Converge Console a icon appears on your desktop You can now start Console over IP by double clicking the icon or through the All Programs gt ClearOne Communications gt Converge Console program group in the Windows Start menu 16 To use a USB connection with Console connect USB cables between the PC and the Converge Converge Pro device NOTE Windows automatically detects the device and begins the USB device driver installation This process occurs the first time a new Converge Converge Pro model is connected to the system and once when you switch to a different USB port on the system If you install drivers for a model and subsequently connect another model to the system via USB Windows will repeat the installation process for the new device type 17 When the Found New Hardware Wizard appears select the No not this time radio button Click Next to begin installation Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will seaech for curent and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read pevacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software O Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time 42 18 Select the
91. 407 0 gt macro u E di Changing the settings of a fader group element or pressing a programmed button in the Web Portal executes the command selected in the Press row of the Command section Releasing a button executes the command selected in the Release row if applicable Accessing the Web Portal After programming User Console and Control Console you can access them using the Web Portal to monitor and manage audio conferences User access privileges to these web based management tools are as follows Administrator Full web access Manager Web access to Dialer Maintenance Registration About and Help pages User Web access to the Dialer Registration About and Help pages To open the web portal enter the IP address of the unit you want to connect with The web portal appears as shown below 206 DIALER MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT REGISTRATION LOG OUT To access programmed call management functions click on DIALER To access programmed control console mixing functions click on MANAGEMENT shown above For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Dialer Phonebook Macro Tab Mic Gating Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco Rx Settings Telco Tx Settings Output Settings Matrix Tab 207 FIRMWARE LOADER Firmware Loader allows you to upgrade firmware when ClearOne releases enhancements All models use the same firmware file con
92. 80TA and SR 1212A The Converge Pro 880TA and SR 1212A units are equipped with four 35 watt amplifiers capable of running in either 8 ohm or 70 100 volt modes Each amplifier operates independently to provide maximum flexibility 69 Click the Channel Tab and refer to the Matrix Row The four Power Amp channels are listed after the Outputs click any of the Power Amp channels to access the available options Pre Gain Gain Coarse Me 1 2 56 50 4 35 28 Post Post Gate 20 z g duane jo Post Gain Output Level 20 Power Amp 1 gt um PowerAmp 1 EQ Filter pee o 5 5 Feedback IMPED m 8 ohm 30 30 C mnoo Options for the selected Power Amp appear below the Matrix row IMPED Selects the Power Amplifier s impendence Options are 8 ohm and 70 100 volt IMPED 8 ohm Sound Mask Launches the Sound Mask pane Meter View View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Sound Mask Und PO CONVERGEDIOTAO Power Amp 1 Powe Amp 2 Power Amp 1 Fowet Amp 7 oan Gen 0 20 Enable Makro I Enable Masking M Mode Vuce 70 Sound Masking is an Amplifier Out only feature consisting of three modes 1 Off Disables the feature 2 Voice Masking operates only in the range us
93. AYSEL Audio Delay Enable This command enables signal delay on a Channel This command can be used to replace the DELAYSEL command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XDELAYSEL lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 23 P J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text 274 SERIAL COMMAND SUPPORT TABLE The following table shows serial command support by Converge Converge Pro device type Note that telco related commands only work on models that have telephone interfaces Converge Pro 880TA 880T 840T TH20 and NC related commands do not work with Converge SR 1212 and SR 1212A AA X X X X AAMB X X X X X X X AARINGS X X X X ACONN X X X X ACONNLVL X X X X AD X X X X ADCLIP X X X X X X X X ADPRESENT X X X X X X X X AEC X X X X X AGC X X X X X X X X AGCSET X X X X X X X X AMBLVL X X X X X X X AMXDUET X X X X X X X X AV X X X X X X X X AVG X X AVR X X AVRT X X AVT X X BAUD X X X X X X X X CALLDUR X X X X CALLERID X X X X CGROUP X X X X X X X CHAIRO X X X X X X X CLEAREFFECT X X X X CLOCK X X X X X X X X COMPDLY X X COMPDLYEN X X COMPRESS X X X X X X X COMPSEL X X X X X X X COUNTRY X X X X X CTRLMASTER X X X X X X X X DECAY X X X X X X X DEFAULT X X X X X X X X DELAY X X X X X X X 275 DELAYSEL X DEVICENAME DEVICESUBTYPE DEVICETYPE DFLTM DIAG DTMFLVL DT
94. Auto 2 Manual On 3 Manual Off Null to query in text GOVER Gating Override This command selects reports the setting of gating override Command Form DEVICE GOVER Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text GPIOSTATUS General Purpose Status This command sets the state of a General Purpose Status Pin Command Form DEVICE GPIOSTATUS Pin Port Value Argument Type Size Values Units Pin Unsigned 1 1 24 Only user definable status pins Integer Port Unsigned 1 1 2 Integer Value Unsigned 2 0 High Integer 1 Low 2 Toggle NULL to query in text 244 GRATIO Gate Ratio Adjust This command selects reports the setting of the gate ratio Command Form DEVICE GRATIO Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 50 dB Null to query in text GREPORT Gate Report This command selects reports the mode of gate and audio presence status reporting Command Form DEVICE GREPORT Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text GRPSEL Gating Group Select This command selects reports which Gating Group a microphone input is assigned Command Form DEVICE GRPSEL lt Channel gt
95. ClearOne CONVERGE PRO 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i TH20 CONVERGE SR 1212 SR 1212A Professional Conferencing Systems INSTALLATION amp OPERATION MANUAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT Telephone 1 800 283 5936 1 801 974 3760 Fax 1 801 977 0087 Email tech support clearone com Web www clearone com CONVERGE PRO 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i CONVERGE SR 1212 SR 1212TA INSTALLATION amp OPERATION MANUAL CLEARONE PART NO 800 151 880 REVISION 3 2 April 2009 2009 ClearOne Communications Inc All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice Other product names may be registered trademarks of their respective owners who do not necessarily endorse ClearOne or ClearOne s products in the United States and or other countries ClearOne Document 800 151 880 Revision 3 2 April 2009 Adobe Flash Copyright and Trademark Notice Adobe Flash Player Copyright 1996 2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated All Rights Reserved Adobe and Flash are either trademarks or registered trademarks in the United States and or other countries TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Converge Pro Product Family Overview sisse hn 1 Important safety Information uad eu err hice i Re ek eo cr ee eda XC X ES 4 Converge Pro Product Descriptions sa sa ani arat ert mper Pu tk Res acad Goa darwin 6 Customer Service and Support
96. D or DVD ROM drive 3 If the Autorun feature is enabled on the PC the Converge Converge Pro Installation window opens automatically Click the Converge Console Software menu option on the left side of the screen to begin installation If Autorun is not enabled open My Computer navigate to the drive holding the Converge Converge Pro Installation amp Documentation CD Double click on the drive icon and launch setup exe 4 When the Converge Converge Pro Installation amp Documentation CD window appears click the Converge Console Software menu option on the left side of the screen 5 The setup program begins by installing Visual C runtime libraries If prompted click the Install button shown below ClearOne Converge Console 2 0 18 Setup The following components will be installed on your machine Visual C Runtime Libraries x86 Do you wish to install these components If you choose Cancel setup will exit 8 When the libraries complete installation Setup checks the system for Adobe Flash If Adobe Flash is not installed Setup starts the Flash installation with a dialog shown below 9 Press Yes to install Adobe Flash Once Flash installs you will need to repeat this installation procedure starting at step 6 to complete Console installation NOTE Adobe Flash is required to use Console Clicking No will abort the Flash and Console 10 The Converge Console Setup Wizard appears Press the Next button a
97. DC max 40 mA each 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software Converge Console Power Input Range Auto Adjusting 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption e 30 W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 17 25 x 10 25 x 1 75 e 43 8 x 26x 4 5 cm Weight 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 lbs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 C to 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals See Appendix D Compliance AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 880 Converge Pro 880 8 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer 289 CONVERGE PRO 880T Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 22 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q e THD N 0 0296 Dynamic Range gt 100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk 91 dB re 20 dBu 9 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features Number of Open Microphones NOM PA Adaptive Mode First Mic Priority Mode Last Mic Mode Maximum of Mics Mode Ambient Level Gate Threshold Adjust Off Attenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features 37x38 matrix 12analog in out 12 expan
98. DELAYSEL Delay Select This command selects reports the delay activation of an assignable processing channel Command Form DEVICE DELAYSEL Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 P Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off t On 2 Toggle Null to query in text DEVICENAME Argument Identification Label This selects reports the Device Argument identification label of the specific channel COMMAND FORM DEVICE DEVICENAME Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 7 I M L 235 Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 Label String 12 1 12 characters CLEAR clear the label Null to query in text DEVICESUBTYPE Sets the Subtype of a Connected Device This command enables disables or reports the current type of device connected to an input or output Command Form DEVICE DEVICESUBTYPE Channel lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 7 O M L Value Unsigned Integer 2 NULL to query in text DEVICETYPE Sets the Type of a Connected Device This command enables disables or reports the current type of device connected to an input or output Command Form DEVICE DEVICETYPE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and C
99. E E C ERU 237 Feedback Elimination Fixed Filter ROE RRR ARS 238 FEG Feedback Elimination Auto Gain iiis 238 FEGL Feedback Elimination Gain Level 00 238 FELD Feedback Elimination Lock Depth ehe e a 238 FEM Feedback Elimination Mode ssssssss sss 239 FEN Feedback Elimination Nodes cereo cr ee Y er Y eee e EG Ra Ra 239 FER Feedback Elimination Node ERRORES 239 FERNG Feedback Elimination Ring Elimination 239 FESC Feedback Elimination Setup Complete 240 FES Feedback Elimination Setup esee ese as d rd ean 240 FILTER Filter Adjust iiis esee Re see dec he edes add re y EE Res 240 FILTSEL Fiter Sele epe eee vs ee ec Ch e e E e cra ace acest RE n a 241 FLOW FOW e eee aede e d ed CR ROGER spina ER 241 FMP First Mic Priority Mode i i dede de ded dedii 241 GAIN Gain Adjustment 5 esses secte et eem a or Kee a a c Re teet ol ce E e C PCR DR 241 GATE Gate Status iis Lebe roe bed tend beaded A P Eee t d bru pe ra idus doles 242 GHOLD Gate Hold Time Adjust 242 GMODE Gating iicet ae aed E qa e SG t Occasus cadera ol e Wr oen 242 GPIOSTATUS General Purpose Status 0 000 242 GRATIO Gat
100. EAR clear the label Null to query in text 249 MAX Maximum Gain Setting This command changes or reports back the maximum gain setting for an input output or assignable processing block Command Form DEVICE MAX Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 8 5 7 12 16 17 1 M PL F T R Value Signed Float 2 65 00 20 00 dB Null to query in text MC Multi Channel Mode This command groups audio controls for channels Audio Controls include Gain Ramp Gain and Mute Command Form DEVICE MC Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 1 n Max number of channels in Multi Channel Group divided by 2 Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Group 2 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel See GroupAndChannels Group Bitmap Hexadecimal 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Channel 3 31 30 90 Integer Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 4 Up t o maximum mmber of channels per group MCGAIN Multi Channel Gain This command that groups adjusts reports audio gain of the grouped channels Command Form DEVICE MCGAIN Channel Group Value Absol Rel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 n Max number of channels in Multi Channel Group divided by 2 Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Unsigned 2 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel In
101. EBOOKADD Adds an Entry to the Phonebook This command saves an entry in the phonebook There is no query for this command No two entries can share the same label An argument error will be returned if an entry already exists To change an entry you must first delete it and then add it again If label is blank the first 20 characters of the number will be used as the label The Number argument must not be blank If an entry already exists with the assigned speed dial it will be overwritten The entries are alphabetized based on Label Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKADD ID Number Label Argument Type Size Values Units Speed Dial Unsigned Integer 4 0 for not assigned to a speed dial 1 20 String 44 1 44 chars 0 9 Label String 16 1 16 chars 261 PHONEBOOKONT Counts Entries in the Phonebook This command queries the number of entries in the phonebook This command is query only Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKONT lt Value gt Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 20 PHONEBOOKDEL Deletes an Entry in the Phonebook This command deletes an entry in the phonebook There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKDEL lt Label gt Argument Type Size Values Units Label String 16 1 16 chars PHONEBOOKREAD Queries the Phonebook by Index This command queries an entry in the phonebook This command is query only Command Form DEVICE PHONEBOOKREAD lt I
102. For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics AEC Auto Echo Cancellation NC Noise Cancellation Configuration Mode Channel Tab Matrix Tab Processing Settings Fader Settings 76 CHANNEL TAB OVERVIEW The Channel section of Console makes the full set configuration controls available for a given channel from input to processing to output The type of channel selected in the Tree View tab of the Current Unit pane determines the contents of the Channel pane in the center of Console The channels available in the Tree View tab are e Input Channels Line Input Channels e Telco Rx Channel e Output Channels e Telco Tx Channel e Processing Channels e Fader Channels Accessing Channel Tab Selecting a channel in the Tree View tab displays the Channel Tab for that channel For example the channel tab for a mic channel is shown below Mode Configuration Ske Data Delat Unt Data Defaut Not Connected MMM MMMM Ste Unt Convergece0TAQ0 Device ID 0 Channel Configuration Controls As shown above the configuration settings for a channel are displayed as controls buttons sliders check boxes selection lists text entry boxes in the Channel pane Use the text entry boxes to assign custom names Use the drop down lists to select from a list of configuration values Use the sliders to set a discrete value for channel configuration parameters PPWR Some buttons such as the
103. Group 1 1 3 7 I M L Threshold Signed Integer 1 50 0 dB Null to query in text Target Signed Integer 1 30 20 dB Response Unsigned Float 2 0 10 10 00 S Time Gain Unsigned Float 2 0 00 18 00 dB AMBLVL Ambient Level Adjust This command selects reports the ambient level Command Form DEVICE AMBLVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Signed Float 2 80 00 0 00 dB Null to query in text AMXDUET Use AMX Duet Discovery This command sets and reports the status of AMX Duet Discovery Command Form DEVICE AMXDUET Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 0n 2 toggle Null to query in text AUDIOMASTER Expansion Bus Audio Master Mode This command reports the mode of the unit for control of the expansion bus audio Command Form DEVICE AUDIOMASTER Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 Master 2 Slave Null to query in text AV Adaptive Volume This command enables disables adaptive volume tracking on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE AV lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Float 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text 230 AVG Adaptive Volume Gain This command sets the maxim
104. Initializing If an error occurs contact ClearOne Technical Support When initialization is complete ClearOne Converge Model Number appears on the LCD panel along with the device type device ID device name IP address and firmware revision level as shown below Model DeviceType ID Name IP Address Firmware Level To access the LCD menu press the Select button The Converge Menu appears as shown below Front Panel Lock Using Console you can create a PIN code and lock the front panel to prevent unauthorized access to LCD menu functions When the lock feature is enabled and the front panel is unlocked it will automatically re lock after 3 minutes of inactivity See the Unit Properties topic for instructions on how to enable the lock feature For more information see the Table of Contents for these related topics Macros Presets Controls and Connections Console Configuration Mode Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco RX Settings Telco TX Settings Processing Settings Output Settings LCD Channels Menu LCD Settings Menu LCD Macros Menu LCD Presets Menu Device IDs Unit Properties 35 LCD CHANNELS MENU The LCD Channels Menu allows you to adjust the gain level and turn mute on or off for all channels Accessing the Channels Menu To access the Channels menu press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Channels and press the Select button The Channels me
105. Install the software automatically radio button in the second screen of the wizard shown below then click Next to proceed with installation Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software foc ClearOne Converge Pro 840T If your hardware came with an installation CD floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Install trom a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 19 When the Windows unsigned driver warning dialog appears click Continue Anyway Windows XP or Install this driver software anyway Windows Vista to install the drivers 20 When the USB driver installation is complete click Finish to close the wizard 21 If you will be using IP to run Console connect Ethernet cables between your LAN and Converge Converge Pro device s The Console software and your Converge Converge device s are now ready for use If you experience any problems during installation contact ClearOne technical support 43 CONVERGE CONSOLE OVERVIEW The Converge Console software provides a powerful intuitive interface for configuring and controlling your Converge Converge Pro system While you can use LCD Programming for simple configuration tasks you must use Console to configure the advanced settings required to customize units for your application Accessing Converge Console Start Converge Console by double clickin
106. LDED 6 BLK 3 COND 699 150 006 QTY 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY RJ45 RJ45 18 830 150 004 QTY 1 CONN TERM BLOCK F 12 POS ORANGE 673 017 112 QTY 2 CABLE ASSY USB A B TYPE 6FT 830 153 001 QTY 1 4 MANUAL CONVERGE 840T 800 151 880 QTY 1 22 CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS Refer to the following diagrams and descriptions for Converge Pro front panel controls and back panel connectors Converge Pro Front Panels Converge Pro 880 Front Panel METER 30404 0 2 23 Converge Pro 8i Front Panel 9 go METER 330 10 4 0 4 812 6000000 A B Converge Pro Front Panel Control Descriptions A USB Type B Port Provides convenient front panel connectivity for laptops and PCs Microphone On LEDs Indicate microphone gate status and mute state LCD Display Shows model number unit name IP address firmware version menu pages menu options configuration settings and parameter values Menu Dial Navigates the Converge Pro LCD programming menu and enables you to modify basic configuration settings ESC Button Returns you to the previous screen on the LCD display Select Button Displays the Converge Pro LCD programming menu and selects the highlighted option 24 LED Bar Meter Displays the audio level of a selected input output processing or fader channel Default meters 880 Output 12 880T Output 12 84
107. LED meter All Converge Pro meters are peak level meters Delay Delay calculates the amount of signal delay based on the distance between audio source and audience and the temperature Introducing an appropriate amount of delay can maintain acoustical alignment and proper sound imaging in a room regardless of speaker location This setting can also compensate for propagation delay caused by signal processing such as analog to digital conversion Delay is set in the Channel Property Configuration window for Processing channels See also Processing Blocks Device ID A number which identifies the unit when multiple units of the same device type are connected via the Expansion Bus All Converge Pro units ship from the factory with a default DID of 0 Device Type A number which identifies the type of unit Converge Pro Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows Device Type Device ID Range 880 1 0 7 TH20 2 0 840T 3 0 7 8i A 0 7 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Part of the IP protocol suite DHCP enables a host server to dynamically assign IP addresses subnet masks default gateways and other parameters to devices on IP based networks See also Default Gateway and Subnet Mask 311 Dial Tone Level A setting in the Channel Property Configuration window for Telco Rx channels that allows you to adjust the dial tone level in 1dB steps to 120 DNS Domain Name System Part of the IP protocol suite DNS manages the tran
108. Last Number This command redials the last number There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE REDIAL lt Channel gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 REFSEL Reference Select for PA Adaptation amp AEC This command selects reports which output or expansion bus reference is used for a Mic input as a reference for power amp adaptation mode and acoustic echo cancellation where applicable Command Form DEVICE REFSEL Channel Ref Group Ref Channel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See 3 M in Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Reference Group Group 1 2 8 20 A B E H J Reference Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Null to query in text REFSET Reference Channel Set Up This command selects reports the output the reference channel tracks Command Form DEVICE REFSET Channel Reference Output Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 20 B Value Reference Output 2 0 none See 2 O in Groups and Channels Null to query in text RESET Reset Resets the unit There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE RESET No Arguments RING Ring Indication This command indicates a ringing line This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set Command Form DEVICE RING Channel Value Argument Size Values Units
109. ONELVL DUPDATE DVER ENETDOMAIN ENETGATE ENETSUBN EREF EVENT DIAL DID ENETADDR ENETDHCP ENETDNS ENETDNSA ENETDNSA2 x lt 2X KKK KK KK KKK ES lt ES gt ES gt ES gt ES gt ES X CO EM o 2 9 ma EM o EUM EM EM EN o gwg Mos NUS pog o Nus FILTER FILTSEL LOW MP GAIN GATE GHOLD GMODE GOVER GPIOSTATUS GRATIO GREPORT 276 GRPSEL HOOK X HOOKD LABEL LCDCONTRAST LMO LOCALNUM LOCBLDG LOCCITY LOCCNTRY LOCCOMP LOCREGION LOCROOM LOCSITENAME LOCSTATE LOGMASK LVL LVLREPORT LVLREPORTEN IANUFACTURER ES gt lt ES gt ES gt lt gt lt ES gt gt C CGAIN CMINMAX CMUTE CRAMP IN INMAX LINE ODEL TRX TRXCLEAR TRXLVL UTE CD CSEL LP OM TPSRV ULL OFFA PAA PACEN 277 PAENERGY PAEQEN PAEQRST PAEQSET PAFLT PAIMPED PALEN PALT PANGAT PANGEN PANGF PANGM PANGT PAPOL PARST PASME PASML PASSM PASMT PATO PBDIAL gt lt ES gt lt ES gt lt ES X Ba gt lt ES gt ES gt ES gt lt ES gt lt ES gt PHONEBOOKADD PHONEBOOKCNT PHONEBOOKDEL PHONEBOOKREAD pp ES x ES gt lt ES PRESET PRGSTRING PTTTHRESHOLD PUSHTOTALK RAMP gt lt gt lt pa gt ES ba gt lt 2X lt KKK X REDIAL gt lt REFSEL REFSET RESET X G GEREN GERLVL GERSEL GERTEST gt lt
110. OUTPUT SETTINGS Output Settings enable you to customize output channel settings All settings for a given output are available on the Channel screen Accessing Output Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired output channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane 9933a3mpaumas one Mode Corfigwation Ste Data Delak Unt Data Oefouk Not Connected EBENEN Ste Unt Cormerge620TA00 Device 100 _ The center pane of the screen displays a signal flow diagram a real time Output Level Gain meter as well as the channel routing matrix which shows the audio routing configuration for the selected output channel The following sections describe how to use output channel configuration controls Channel Label Line 5 input 5 Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Level NOM Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling in the number of open mics When using NOM over the expansion bus only R Buses support passing NOM information The default is On 117 Mute Button elite Tesi Clicking the Mute button toggles muting The default is Off
111. Objects and devices created with these earlier versions will need to be re created The Database Tab enables you to create modify and save AV devices channel objects and advanced objects AV devices allow you to save pre defined configurations for a particular type of device such as a ceiling microphone Channel objects allow you to save pre defined configurations for a channel Advanced objects allow you to save matrix macro control and preset objects for advanced configuration and automation tasks Using AV devices and channel objects you can create standardized configurations for particular room types and equipment and quickly configure a venue See Drag amp Drop Configuration for more information ssing the Database To access the Database select the Database Tab from the Tab Bar in Console Fle Wer Coret Modes Servo Pep Hes7Teoott5ss8D0PeuNzJg 9 ClearOne Sale Selection tre werni Outro Grm tero tet teroase once 7 Av omnes Const Current oe 20 Comvengessor 41 ReadOnly She View Tree View FS 0 Corwerge e 0 A A pepe mme p me eget Esen me Deve Cored ar tewes ode Canfguraion Good tink Dat Good Connected BUSSSBEN See Unt Converged4 t 43 Device 10 00 As shown above there are two tabs available in the center pane AV Devices and Objects A corresponding tab i
112. Ost NO E Ozin Pres Unt MIC Lin Output Av Devices Objects t Taleo RX Pres Expansion Audio RX Fro From Esp T A dialog prompts you for the distance of the microphone to the talker Select a value and press OK to apply the object to the channel Microphone Distance A microphone icon appears next to the channel indicating that the channel is using an AV device object configuration Ura channel View Matric AECReterence Macro Gating contro siring Evert Schecter Database P 04 AE N o 1 NOM Mut L Output AV Devices Objects From bg tiraa Click on the microphone icon to view object properties and enter a serial number in the AV Devices Properties dialog 171 AV Device Properties To view detailed information about an AV device s configuration settings or to create a custom AV device use the AV Devices pane of the Database tab Channel Objects In addition to using AV devices you can drag and drop Channel Objects in the Unit Tab and the Channel Tab to instantly apply a saved configuration to a channel You can save channel objects for all Converge channel types including Mic Input Line Input Telco Rx Telco Tx Output Processing and Fader channels For example you can configure NOM mute and gain settings for Output 1 on the Channel tab as shown below To save the object right click anywhere in the signal flow diagram and sel
113. PPWR Phantom Power button shown above toggle features on and off 77 Other buttons including AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation NC Noise Cancellation Filter AGC Automatic Gain Control ALC Automatic Level Control shown above bring up the Channel Property Configuration screen shown below L T 1 Dranarty Canfin ati nanne ODertv LO IV Enable Acoustic Echo Canceller AEC Enable Push to Tak Mode Nomlinesr Processing NLP Pre Gain PTT Threshold 0 PA Adapt and AEC Reference Ebus Ref 1 The Channel Property Configuration screen is used to configure Mic Input Line Input and Processing channels The tabs available in this screen change depending on the type of channel selected in the Tree View pane of Console In addition to the configuration controls available in the Channel pane there are meters showing signal levels in real time at each stage of signal processing The meters shown change with the type of channel selected For example the meters for Mic Input channels are shown below Pre Gain gan r Post Gain Post Process Post Gate E coarse 21 20 m E 41 46 35 5 5 28 21 E a 12 85 0 0 dB E NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters The channel routing matrix of the Channel pane shows the associated Matrix row and routing configuration for the channel selected in the Tree View tab of the Current Unit pane The cha
114. RE ee eee o resa Pe e roe aes 235 DID Bevice ID os itp beri in D obe tb Ad eA 235 DTMFLVL DTMF Tone Level 0006 ess teens 235 DTONELVE Dial Tone Level o eee CR he re e e E COE een 235 DUPDATE Download Update 1 osea t ede bn Rhe RR RC RE ECC D do d 235 DVER Command Dictionary Version ess 235 ENETADDR Ethernet Port IP 5 236 ENETDHCP Ethernet DHCP 236 ENETDNSA2 Ethernet DNS Server Address 2 236 ENETDNSA Ethernet DNS Server Address esses 236 ENETDNS Ethernet DNS Selection 0 0 0000s 236 ENETDOMAIN Ethernet Domain Argument 236 ENETGATE Ethernet Default Gateway 5 237 ENETSUBN Ethernet Subnet Mask sse 237 Expansion Bus Reference 237 EVENT Run Scheduled Event eco eCo CP we We dean sated rer ee e E Gp en 237 FEB Feedback Elimination Bandwidth scs cce RR hea ages Poe RR ER EA 237 FEDR Feedback Elimination Dynamic Node 238 FE Feedback Elimination Enable sere err RR ro FREE E O
115. RESET MENU The LCD Preset Menu allows you to execute presets from the Converge Pro front panel To create presets use Console in Preset Mode Accessing the Presets Menu To access the menu press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Presets and press the Select Button The Preset Menu appears as shown below Executing Presets Use the following procedure to execute presets from the front panel LCD display Use the Menu Dial to highlight the preset you want to execute Press the Select button Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected preset or No to cancel Press the Esc button to return to the main LCD menu BUNT You can also run presets from the Services menu while Console is in Configuration Mode For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics LCD Programming Overview LCD Settings Menu LCD Channels Menu Preset Mode Console Overview Services Menu Overview Configuration Mode Overview 40 m CHAPTER 3 CONVERGE CONSOLE PROGRAMMING INSTALLING CONVERGE CONSOLE The Converge Console software is designed for Windows XP and Vista operating systems 1 Ensure that all other programs or applications are closed and disconnect any USB cables from all Converge Converge Pro devices you will reconnect them later 2 Insert the Converge Converge Pro Installation amp Documentation CD into the C
116. Roon Unt CorergebA7T 4D Devis ID 0 The center pane displays a signal processing diagram meters and configuration controls for the selected mic input channel as shown above Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path The meters and configuration controls for mic input channels are explained in the following sections Channel Label Mic 1 1 i Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced PPWR Phantom Power PPWR mmm The PPWR Phantom Power button toggles phantom power on and off Phantom power is an auxiliary power source used to power certain types of microphones Phantom power voltage is 24VDC The default is On 97 Pre Gain Meter Pre Gain 36 61 The Pre Gain meter displays the mic input level before gain adjustments Meter range is determined by the Coarse Gain Slider in the Gain section of the screen as described below NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters Gain Section 5 zx food The Coarse and Fine gain sliders are used to match the level settings between mic inputs and to adjust the volume level for a given mic input channel The Min Max fine gain sliders are used to set minimum and maximum gain settings and to report min max gain settings via serial commands
117. S Site Selection As shown above the center pane displays a signal flow diagram for the telco rx channel real time peak level meters as well as the channel routing matrix that displays the audio routing configuration for the channel Configuration settings for the telco rx channel are displayed as controls buttons sliders check boxes selection lists which are located at the appropriate stage in the signal flow The following sections describe how to use these controls in order from left to right and top to bottom as they appear in the signal flow to configure the telco receive channel settings for your installation Channel Label Telco Rx 1 Telco RX i Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Labels are shown throughout Console wherever the channel is referenced Channel Configuration Buttons mln The Channel Configuration Buttons enable you to configure settings for the telco rx channel With the exception 108 of the Mute ClearEffect and ALC buttons which toggle their respective functions and have no user configurable settings clicking a channel configuration button displays the Channel Property Configuration window as shown below Channel Property Configuration Telco RX NC Telco Settings Telco Meters The window contains three tabs NC Noise Cancellation Telco Settings and Telco Meters which are described in th
118. Site option If you are Connected to a Site a Confirm dialog appears when you select Exit as shown below Confirm 9 Site is Connected ES Close Site Press Yes to confirm the exit or No to return to Console Clicking Yes brings up another Confirm dialog as shown below Confirm 9 Save Changes to Site File Site1 No Click Yes to save changes to the Site File No to exit Console without saving changes or Cancel to abort the exit and return to Console For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Site File Overview Print Reports Create a New Site Connect To A Site Unit Properties 183 PRINT REPORTS The Print Reports option on the File menu allows you to print a configuration properties report for a Site or Unit Accessing Print Reports To print a site or unit report click on the File menu select Print then select Print Site Report or Print Unit Report as shown below come New Ste Open Ste Close Ste Save Save As She Properties Poet nx 1 Dowd cog 2 Sete 3 Stere te The Report window appears as shown below Report Window Chase f 9202007 223 19 The report button bar provides buttons for viewing and printing the document as well as saving the report to a PDF file When you are finished viewing the report click Close to close the report window and return to Console
119. TAGEINSIDE Qual RED SERVICE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT TO RAIN THEPRODUCT PERSONNEL THE PRODUCT OR MOISTURE SEE MARKING ON BOTTOM BACK OF PRODUCT Save These Instructions Converge Pro 880TA The 880TA stands as the new flagship of the Converge Pro line Re designed re tooled with added power and functionality the 880TA also provides industry leading expansion capabilities Add Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel ClearEffect wideband emulation for speech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel Caller ID amp selectable ringers Custom ring cadence detect Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Enhanced Feedback Canceller Multichannel Control on each amplifier Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Ch
120. Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 23 P J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 None 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 Null to query in text XCOMPRESS Compressor Adjust This command controls reports the signal compression setting on a Channel This command can be used to replace the COMPRESS command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XCOMPRESS Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel il See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J P Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle XCOMPSEL Compressor Enable Null to query in text This command enables signal compression on a Channel This command can be used to replace the COMPSEL command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XCOMPSEL Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J P Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 2 XDELAY Audio Delay This command controls reports signal delay on a Channel This command can be used to replace the D command for the P group Null to query in text ELAY Command Form DEVICE XDELAY Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 23 P J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 0 250 00 ms Null to query in text 273 XDEL
121. View voor MILL F Input 1 Set the desired Gain settings for the Input channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation NC Noise Cancellation and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the channel Output Channel Settings MIC Line Pres _ NC Mie Gate Input1 2 GMB O O O o n Input2 90B ao Input3 10098 5 3 9 9 gt ma BS J Line Pres Gain e AGC 5 Input 5 inputs Ges 9 o Input m 100085 Q inputs e GBS e Telco RX Pres Mte NC 1 RX a 00B Q oe Pointing to an output channel on the right side of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel in white on the left side of the screen shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane shown below Site View Tree View ITT LR Output 1 Set the desired Gain settings for the output channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Level and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the cha
122. ach be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command Converge Pro 8i An input only expansion box for the Converge Pro platform The 8i delivers new economical configuration flexibility It can be added to 880 840T and TH20 systems for additional microphone and line inputs allowing customers to match the number of inputs and outputs required for specific conferencing and sound reinforcement installations Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Economical Mic Line only mixer for large configurations where additional output channels are not required Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage 0 56aB in 7 increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Perfor
123. ain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation Mic Gating Mic Input Settings 90 AGC ALC AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL TAB AGC ALC enables AGC or ALC and allows you to configure AGC settings for the selected input channel Either AGC or ALC can be enabled you cannot use them both at the same time AGC keeps an input signal at a target gain level that you select and is generally used for Line Input channels ALC automatically keeps an input signal at a constant level and is generally used to keep speech levels constant on Mic Input channels With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired Mic input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press either the AGC or ALC button located just below the Post Gain meter Fie Wew Add Comet Modes Servers EUN i YEG SA EDBSUBGS su ClearOne wb Caren Mas Reference hr 1m MIT G pe lt a TU 0 Cone 0 0 2A LU ret ress 8 Rx b v d oss dpa t Ont nee Out 4 Ospas The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the AGC ALC tab selected as shown below joa 91 Use the AGC ALC radio buttons to select Off ALC or AGC The default is Off ALC is performed automatically there are no user configurable settings for ALC NOTE AGC occu
124. al Telephone Noise Cancellation Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Expansion Bus Connection CAT 5 RJ45 Mix Minus Structure 18 Audio Buses 6 Gating Buses 8 PA Reference Buses Network 10 100 Auto Switching PC and Network Port HTTP Server Telnet Client SNMP Agent SNTP Client DNS DHCP RS 232 DB 9 e 9 6k 115k baud 8 1 0 Hardware Flow Control USB 2 0 Compatible Type B connector GPIO DB 25 female A B Inputs Active Low Outputs Open Collector 40Vdc 40 mA Power 100 240VAC 50 60 Hz 300 Watts maximum Environmental Operating temperature 32 122 degrees F Humidity 15to 80 Mechanical Dimensions 2RU 3 5 Hx 17 25 W x 15 92 D e Weight lt 30 Ibs Compliance EMC FCC Part 15 Class A EMI EN55024 Safety IEC60950 CSA CCC Class 2 Wiring Required 293 CONVERGE PRO 840T Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q THD N 0 0296 e Dynamic Range 7100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk 91 dB re 20 dBu 9 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features Number of Open Microphones NOM PA Adaptive Mode First Mic Priority Mode Last Mic Mode Maximum of Mics Mode Ambient Level Gate Threshold Adjust Off At
125. ange the value use the slider or selector box Range is from 65 to 20dB in 5 increments The default is Min Max Limits Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min max levels 123 Post Gain Meter m Post Gain The Post Gain level meter displays the post gain signal level in cB Limiter Limiter The Limiter limits the output level to the telco side to comply with telco system requirements Note that the meter is only a graphic it does not show limiter activity Output Level Meter Output Level 20 30 Shows the signal level in dB when a signal is present Channel Routing Matrix Telco Tx The graphic below shows the Telco Tx channel routing matrix EE ssssndiiin ini ninm mi All inputs from Exp O and from Exp S are selected as cross points and the first four inputs are gated by default Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and
126. annel Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines 18 expansion busses Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Ten microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS Converge Pro 880 The successor to the industry leading XAP 800 The 880 delivers rich functionality with improved audio performance enhanced management and simplified configuration for audio conferencing and sound reinforcement applications Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp s
127. anufacturer s Name ClearOne Communications Manufacturer s Address Edgewater Corporate Park South Tower 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 Salt Lake City Utah 84116 U S A EU Representative Name ClearOne Communications Ltd EU Representative Address Atlantic House Imperial Way Reading Berkshire RG2 OTD United Kingdom Model Converge Pro 880TA amp Converge SR 1212A Product Standard s to which Conformity of the Council Directive s is declared EMC 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive EN 55103 1 1997 Emissions EN 55103 1 1997 EN 55022 2006 EN 61000 3 2 2000 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 EN 55103 2 1997 Immunity EN 61000 4 2 2001 EN 61000 4 3 2006 EN 61000 4 4 2004 EN 61000 4 5 2005 EN 61000 4 6 2006 EN 61000 4 11 2004 307 Electromagnetic Compatibility Product family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use Part 1 Emissions Magnetic Field Emissions Annex A 10 cm Information technology equipment Radio disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement Radiated Class A Limits Conducted Class B Limits Part 3 Limits Section 2 Limits for harmonic current emissions Section 3 Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current up to and including 16 A Electromagnetic Compatibility Product
128. applications and venues Upload Download AV Devices and Objects To upload or download ALL AV Devices or channel Objects in the database use the Upload and Download buttons on the Database Button Bar These features enable you to share databases among sites applications and venues Modifying AV Devices and Objects To modify AV Devices and channel Objects select the device or object in the Object Pane modify the configuration settings for the device or object in the Center Pane and click the Save button on the Database Button Bar When you make changes to the device or object Edit appears at the top of the Center Pane NOTE Pre defined AV devices created by ClearOne are ReadOnly as indicated in the center pane They cannot be modified or deleted 164 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Site Properties Unit Properties Unit Tab Channel Tab Overview Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Telco RX Settings Output Settings Telco TX Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Matrix Tab Preset Mode Overview 165 OPTIMIZING GAIN STRUCTURE Optimizing Gain Structure maximizes the signal to noise ratio for each channel optimizes the performance of processing functions and ensures optimal audio quality Use these guidelines when optimizing initial gain structure for a venue Connect all input sources and output devices to the Converge Co
129. are Loader displays progress in the Upload column of the firmware file table and in the Status Bar at the bottom of the window as shown below 208 Converge Firmware Loader Select Firmware File Firmware File C Program Files ClearOne Converge Console Firmware Converge mdo Firmware File Version 0 0 45 Date 03 06 2007 Name Type Device Version Upload 530 Converge840T 03 Cancel Upload Firmware Close In addition the LED indicators on the status bar in Console turn yellow to indicate the firmware load is in progress as shown below Converge Console Site1 cnv View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT E6 33 EOBSERBED On 7 ClearOne Site Selection ore AC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Detetiace LM Current Unit input Output 1 H0 CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View pale fol I STE TT f PRY N lt XEcc4H2POVO p ER z C9 lode Configuration Site Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut Not Connected _ When the firmware load is complete the unit reboots The unit now has the selected firmware file loaded If you experience problems with firmware loads please contact ClearOne Technical Support For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Configure Unit Properties C
130. arriage return t horizontal tab v vertical tab backslash PTTTHRESHOLD Push to Talk Threshold This command selects reports the setting of the push to talk threshold for a microphone Command Form DEVICE PTTTHRESHOLD lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Float 2 100 to 0 dB Null to query in text PUSHTOTALK Push to Talk This command selects reports the setting of push to talk for a microphone Command Form DEVICE PUSHTOTALK lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Null to query text RAMP Ramp Gain Adjustment This command starts stops the gain ramp for an input output or assignable processing block There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE RAMP Channel Group Rate Target Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel i See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 5 7 12 16 17 I J MBL E T R Rate Signed Integer 1 50 50 dB s If value 0 the ramp will stop If value lt 0 the gain will ramp down If value gt 0 the gain will ramp up Target Signed Integer 1 65 20 dB If NULL in text or 0x80 in binary the ramp will use the channel s maximum and minimum for a target 263 REDIAL Redial the
131. ars numerically in the cross point box within the matrix Copy and Paste Cells You can copy a single cell or the entire matrix using the shortcut menu options To copy a cross point to multiple cross points press lt Ctrl C gt to copy then press Ctrl V while holding down the left mouse button and clicking on the cross points to which you want to copy the settings Copy and Paste Matrix To copy the entire matrix use the shortcut menu commands or press lt Ctrl G gt to copy the matrix select the unit you want to copy the matrix to in the Site View Tab and press lt Ctrl P gt to paste the matrix into the matrix screen for the selected unit Clear Matrix Press the Clear Matrix button to clear all current matrix settings A Confirm dialog appears asking you to confirm the operation Use this option with caution because the operation cannot be undone Exporting Matrix Objects Matrix objects allow you to save customized matrix configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly re configure the entire matrix to accommodate changes in conferencing or venue configuration requirements and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration To capture the current matrix configuration and save it as a matrix object right click anywhere in the center pane of the matrix screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu To apply a matrix object drag it from the Objects Pane and drop i
132. ate from the Macro drop down list Macro Selection Macro Macro Description 2 Low enne NOTE Used macros are indicated by an asterisk in the macro drop down list 2 Press Change Name to assign a name to the macro optional Enter the name into the Change Name dialog that appears NOTE Macro names appear in Console macro lists and on the LCD Macro menu Using brief descriptive names makes it easier to identify a macro s functionality Enter a description of the macro s functionality in the Macro Description entry field optional Select the device Type DID Device ID number and Command from the drop down lists When you select a command a description of it appears in the Command Description box The parameters associated with the command also appear along with the valid values or range for each parameter in the Argument Description box shown below 6 Setthe parameter values for the command as required optional gud oo 148 Command Editor Command Descrgtiun Argument Descrgtin Sets the gan for an input Output Processor ChanneiOroup C Line routs Telco Rx or Telco Tx Merophone Quiputs P Processing R Telco Rc T Tesco tz Command Chernel roup T parr ceni ensem 7 Click Add to add the command to the end of the macro or Insert to insert the command before the currently selected row of the macro The command appears
133. ating Converge Console Configuration Mode Tabs Console has ten tabs on the Tab Bar that provide specific configuration options while in Configuration Mode Unit Channel Matrix AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database These tabs are described in the following sections 64 UNIT TAB The Unit Tab shows a detailed block diagram for the unit selected in the site pane The diagram shows the path of the audio signal based on the current unit configuration and provides a graphical explanation of each stage of audio processing Accessing the Unit Tab Console automatically starts in Configuration Mode When you load a site file Console displays the Unit tab by default as shown below To switch to the Unit tab from any other tab click the Unit tab on the Tab Bar Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT E 23 ENSASI On 000 ge ClearOne Channel Matrix AEC Reference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Pres G EC One 1 NOM Mite Ga Pres Output Current Unit put 1 me Output 1 CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View PAOI IE e o 2 T v v w x z 1 t a 7 Converge ode Configuration _ Ste Data Defaut Unit Data Defaut Not Connected NOTE The Unit tab shown above is for an 880AT with the Tree View
134. ating Group topics for more information Control Bus The control bus is an independent channel from the E bus s audio channel This allows control information to pass even if the units are not using the audio link All models support the use of the Converge Converge Pro serial command set through the control bus 30 DEVICE IDS Device IDs provide unique identifiers for all Converge Converge Pro units that are linked together After making E bus connections between units you must set a unique Device ID number for all units of the same Device Type in the network Device Types and IDs Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows Device Type Device ID Range 880 1 0 B TH20 2 0 840T 3 0 B 8i A 0 B 880T D 0 B 880TA H 0 B SR 1212 G 0 B SR 1212A 0 NOTE All models ship from the factory with a default DID of 0 Assigning Device IDs Use the following procedure to assign device IDs using the front panel controls 1 Press the Select button on the front panel The Converge Menu appears 2 Use the Menu Dial to highlight the Settings menu Press the Select button The Settings menu appears o 3 Use the Menu Dial to highlight DID Press the Select button The Device ID menu appears 31 0 4 Use the Menu Dial to highlight the desired value Press the Select button to select it 5 The Change DID Menu prompt appears Choose Yes to set the selected DID value or No to return to the Device ID menu
135. ation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage 0 56aB in 7aB increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four internal amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can e
136. ator and initiates an automatic training cycle When the automatic setup is complete the FESC Feedback Elimination Setup Complete command will be issued There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE FES Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Zero 2 Zero FESC Feedback Elimination Setup Complete This command reports when the automatic feedback eliminator setup training cycle is in progress The training cycle is started using the command FES Feedback Elimination Setup This is a query only command Command Form DEVICE FESC Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Setup Complete 1 Setup in Progress Sent Null Value Returned FILTER Filter Adjust This command selects reports the settings of a filter Command Form DEVICE FILTER Channel lt Group gt Node Type Frequency Gain Slope Bandwidth Subtype Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 5 M P Node Unsigned 1 Group 3 1 4 Integer Group 5 1 15 Type Unsigned 1 0 None Integer 1 All Pass Low Pass High Pass Low Shelving High Shelving Parametric Equalizer 7 CD Horn 8 Bessel Crossover 9 Butterworth Crossover 10 Linkwitz Riley Crossover 11
137. ault restores ALL settings to their factory default values Answer Yes to the prompt to restore default settings or No to retain the existing settings Contrast Contrast allows you to change the LCD contrast level Use the Menu Dial to adjust the contrast level then press the Select button to save it 38 For more information see the Table of Contents for these related topics LCD Programming Overview LCD Channels Menu LCD Macros Menu LCD Presets Menu Site Properties String Tab Unit Properties LCD MACROS MENU The LCD Macros Menu allows you to run macros from the front panel To record Macros use the Macro Tab in Console Accessing the Macros Menu To access the Macros menu press the Select Button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Macros and press the Select Button The Macro Menu appears as shown below Executing Macros Use the following procedure to run macros from the front panel LCD display Use the Menu Dial to highlight the macro you want to run Press the Select button Answer Yes at the prompt that appears to run the selected macro or No to cancel Press the Esc button to return to the main LCD menu PON gt You can also run macros using the Macro tab or the Services menu in Console For more information see the Table of Contents for these related topics LCD Programming Overview LCD Settings Menu LCD Channels Menu LCD Presets Menu Macro Tab 39 LCD P
138. ays it in the Object Tree as shown below Telco Rx 3 Output Gg Telco Tx i3 Processing Fader For more information on using audio devices and channel objects see the Table of Contents for the following topics AV Devices Creating AV Devices Channel Objects Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration 120 Optimizing Output Gain Structure Optimizing gain structure for output channels ensures optimal audio performance When initially configuring an output channel ClearOne recommends that you follow the procedures outlined in the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview Mic Gating Gating Tab Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Telco Rx Settings Optimizing Gain Structure 121 TELCO TX SETTINGS Telco Tx Settings enable you to customize telephone transmit channel settings using the Channel screen Accessing Telco Tx Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the Telco Tx channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane C Converge Console 880ta1 cvg Add Connect Modes Services Help FT coe 25 SORSUBED u Sits Sslection Unt Matric AECReterence macro Gating Contro swing Evert Schecter Database Current Unit Converget 0T A00 As shown above the Center Pane displays a
139. bee eee ee ee rs RRRRRR RR ERE RL PPPS SPSS TPS S PTT SITES gt Output Level Output 1 20 output 1 me mi 5 65 30 This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Output Settings for more information You can change the label name of the output channel in the Output entry box toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button to mute or un mute the channel and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to the output processing or fader channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console Creating Channel Objects One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save a telco rx channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing ma
140. before the channel automatically gates on The gate ratio range is from 0 to 50dB The default is 15dB Hold Time Determines how long the channel stays gated on after the audio falls below the Gate Ratio threshold The hold time range is from 1 to 8 0 seconds The default is 3 seconds Off Attenuation Sets the amount of level reduction applied to a channel when it is gated off The range is from to 60dB The default is 12dB Decay Rate Determines how fast a channel gates off after the Hold Time expires The default is Medium NOTE Changing Hold Time Off Attenuation and Decay Rate also changes the same settings under Manual Gating Auto Gating Ambient Tracking Adaptive Ambient Adjusts the ambient reference level as noise and room conditions change When Adaptive Ambient is on the mic channel monitors the ambient noise level on the input and adjusts the ambient level reference automatically This means that the gate threshold level automatically increases or decreases based on background noise The default is On Manual When Adaptive Ambient is set to Manual the input will use the fixed ambient level you specify in the Ambient Level field as its gating reference Auto Gating Processing Functions Chairman Override Provides gating priority for this mic input over any other mic input within the same gating control mixer group When a mic with Chairman Override enabled gates on all mics which do not have Chairman Override enabled
141. cd 261 RAMP Ramp Gain Adjustment sssssssssssssssss ss 261 REDIAL Redial the Last Number teenies 262 REFSEL Reference Select for PA Adaptation amp 262 REFSET Reference Channel Set 262 RESET Reset 1 ssecexe o esi e cannes re he dos loti red Eats a ba 262 RINGEREN Audible Ring Enable 00 0 ee 263 RINGERLVL Audible Ring Level 00 0 0000 oct tetas 263 RINGERSEL Audible Ring Melody Selection 0 0 2 263 RINGERTEST Audible Ring Melody Test es 263 RING Ring Indication 5i deeem ee tbe eb ete RA ARE ey oxen Pur 262 RXBOOST Receive Boost 264 RXBSTEN Receive Boost Enable 0 0002s 265 SERECHO Serial Echo is sisse redes eL UAR ERR EG GO br Foe OP rcs 265 SFTYMUTE Safety Mute 66 265 SIGGENEN Signal Generator Enable is 265 SIGGEN Signal Generator 94 054 Lebe ettet eed edes ku d eds boe esci etin 265 SIGGENSWEEP Signal Generator Sweep issus sss 266 SIGTOUT Signal Generator Time Out esse e 266 SLVL Speech Level Control esae In HERA RS 266 SMTPSRV SMTP Mail Server Address isses 266 SNMPMNGRIP SNMP Manager Host IP
142. co line goes on or off hook Dial Reports dial command events including DTMF Phonebook Speed Dial and Redial Call Duration Reports the time between on and off hook events for all calls Microphone Gains Reports microphone gain levels Processor Gains Reports processor gain levels Fader Gains Reports fader gain levels Telco Gains Reports telco gain levels Power Amp Gains Reports power amp gain levels Caller ID Shows Caller ID report Power Amp Errors Reports power amp errors NOTE All device events and Event Scheduler events are logged automatically Use the Refresh Clear Save and Print buttons to refresh the log display clear the log save the log to a text file and print the log 199 For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Site Properties System Checks Firmware Loader Console Overview LCD Settings Menu Macro Tab Preset Mode Overview Execute Presets Dialer Phonebook 200 EVENT LOG The Event Log captures Console events for administration and troubleshooting purposes Event types captured include failed login attempts site disconnects unit reboots socket time outs internal system errors and serial command execution errors Accessing Event Log To access the event log select Event Log from the Services menu or click the Event Log button on the Console Button Bar Converge Console Site1 cnv View
143. cords screen selections and the Macro Editor which allows you to create command lines The Macro Editor is also used to modify macros created using the Macro Recorder Macro Recorder Use the following procedure to record a macro using Macro Recorder 1 Click the Record button at the bottom of the Macro screen The Macro dialog appears 2 Select the macro number from the Macro to Record drop down list then click Start 3 The Macro Record dialog appears shown below 147 4 In the Console make the routing and input output configuration changes such as gain adjustments mute etc that you want to include in the macro 5 Click Stop in the Macro Record dialog to end macro recording 6 The macro Command Editor appears with a list of the commands captured Command Editor Command Description Argument Description Channet 1 8 for an Converge 880 8i and 1 4 for an 640T This command selects which output expansion bus reterence is used Ret Group E O 8 1 for a Mic input as reference for power amp g Ret Channet based on Ref Group and device type E O Z ae eet Eee Macro Command List Line Number x n roa j EE 7 Click Save to save the macro You can use the Macro Editor to modify recorded macros as described in the next section Macro Editor Creating Macros Use the following procedure to create a macro using the Macro Editor 1 Select the Macro number to cre
144. cted on the Tab Bar select the desired line input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane C Converge Console Site1 cnv View Add Connect Modes Services FT E0 355 9a ode Configuration Ste Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut Not Connected LatMaco 0 LasPreset O Ste Skew Unt CONVERGEBGOTA 0 Devke ID 1 The Center Pane displays a signal processing diagram meters and configuration controls for selected line input channel as shown above Note that the meters and configuration controls are shown at the appropriate point in the signal path The meters and configuration controls for line inputs are explained in the following sections Channel Label Line 5 input 5 Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced 103 Pre Gain Meter m Pre Gain 36 61 86 The Pre Gain Meter shows the line input level before gain adjustments NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters Gain Slider The Gain Slider adjusts the line input volume level The Min Max fine gain sliders are used to set minimum and maximum gain settings and to report min max gain settings via serial commands You can also set the gain in 5dB increments using the Up Down buttons or enter a value directly in the field Post Gain Meter Post Gain
145. ctly above the currently selected command line in the table 3 When you are finished making changes click Save or Save As to save the macro Running Macros Running Macros Using Console Use the following procedure to run a Macro from Console 149 1 Select the Macro tab from the Console main screen or press the Run Macro button on the button bar only available when Console is in Configuration mode 2 Select the macro from the Select Macro list 3 Click Run to run the macro and close the window Running Macros Using the Front Panel Use the following procedure to run a macro from the front panel 1 Using the Menu Dial select the Macros Menu 2 Select the macro you want to run from list and press the Select button 3 Answer Yes when prompted to run the macro or No to cancel Running Macros Using Control Devices Refer to the Control Tab topic for information on running macros using control devices Exporting Macro Objects Macro Objects allow you to save macros into the Database and reuse them To capture a macro and save it as an object right click anywhere in the center pane of the macro screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu For more information about objects see Creating Channel Objects Matrix Objects Control Objects and Drag amp Drop Configuration For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Controls and Connections Expansion Bus Overview
146. d Channels Destination Group Group 1 2 5 6 12 16 20 A J O B E F T B Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Cross point off 1 Cross point on Not Valid for Mic Sources 2 Toggle Not Valid for Mic Sources 3 Non Gated Mic Sources Only 4 Gated Mic Sources Only 5 Pre AEC Mic Sources Only 6 Routing Prohibited Cross point is off and may not be turned on Null to query in text MTRXCLEAR Clear Matrix Clears the ENTIRE matrix for the unit There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE MTRXCLEAR No Arguments 253 MTRXLVL Matrix Attenuation Adjust This command selects reports the matrix level at the cross point Command Form DEVICE MTRXLVL lt Src Ch gt lt Src Gp Dest Ch Dest Gp Value A R Argument Type Size Values Units Source Channel Channe 1 See Groups and Channels Source Group Group 1 1 3 5 6 7 12 17 Il M P E L F R Destination Channel Channe 1 See Groups and Channels Destination Group Group 1 2 5 6 12 16 H J O P E F T Value Signed Float 4 99 00 99 00 dB Null to query in text Absol Rel 0 A Absolute R Relative Null Relative NOTE Values indicate entry range only Actual internal range of the matrix attenuation is from 60 to 12dB and absolute values are limited to the internal gain range MUTE Mute This command selects reports the setting of mute on a channel Command Form DEVICE MUTE Channel
147. d in the Privacy Act of 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of any personal information collected the purpose of this collection how it is used and what is disclosed to any other party JAPANESE COMPLIANCE The DC resistance of the PSTN line is restricted to 1700 397 1373 Ohms 309 OGAOD PEE A GLOSSARY Acoustic Echo Cancellation AEC A process in which acoustical echo is removed from a signal AEC can be used to remove unwanted signals from mic audio if the unwanted acoustic signal is available separately as an electronic signal Adaptive Ambient This portion of the mixer monitors the varying ambient noise level in the room and changes the threshold level at which a microphone gates on Ambient Level A user defined background noise level used to control microphone gating used only if Adaptive Ambient is disabled Ambient Noise The existing room level noise such as that caused by ventilation systems paper shuffling and background chatter Attack Time Determines how quickly compression is enabled calibrated in milliseconds See also Compression Compressor and Threshold Attenuation A reduction of signal amplitude Audible Hook Indication A series of beeps that indicates when the telephone line goes on or off hook This feature can be turned on or off and the level can be adjusted in the Telco Rx Channel Configuration window Audible Ringer Indication When a call comes in you can hear it ring if A
148. deo um e aer on x AN EUR UR E pdt afi rn 301 APPENDIX D COMPLIANCE 303 FEC Part45 CES 009 Complilaltee 5 5 rane Pedals 303 FCG Part 68 Complianee i isilacse De EROR CGU X Rex pe Pee ede be dese TCR IH eed 303 TABLE OF CONTENTS continued Electrical Safety AQVISON e er hr rece WC CX ea y KOC RO e E ev ie p ieee Oe obs 304 Tm 304 EUROPEAN CONMPLIANGE 2 adc nwa Bor te doe ce da E PR d ios 305 EUDROPEANICONMPIMUANGE ed EE un etc uim decessor e debant iat 307 NEW ZEALAND COMPLIANGE cutem rh rb RR bp Pedro ar eda d do ER 309 JAPANESE 2 xara tt I Gr er pe bes 309 GLOSSARY 310 oe CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION CONVERGE PRO PRODUCT FAMILY OVERVIEW Congratulations You have purchased a ClearOne Converge Pro audio conferencing solution The Converge Pro product family represents a revolutionary advance in state of the art audio technology for large scale conferencing applications ClearOne introduced its first audio conferencing products to the market in 1990 under the brand name Gentner Today ClearOne has over 80 000 installations worldwide in organizations ranging from the Fortune 1 000 to the federal government ClearOne products are used in the most demanding conferencing applicatio
149. dialog as shown below Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below Objects HA Mic S Line E Telco Rx Output GQ Telco Tx E Processing i Fader Hid Fader Channel EH n For more information on using AV devices and channel objects see the following topics AV Devices Creating AV Devices Channel Objects Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Output Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Telco Rx Settings Telco Tx Settings Drag amp Drop Configuration 139 MATRIX TAB The Matrix Tab is used to route audio to one or more destinations outputs expansion bus processing or fader channels and to create cross points between channels Any number of input to output connections can be made in the matrix with level control at each cross point Any input or combination of inputs can be routed to any output or combination of outputs The channels available in routing matrix by model are summarized below Converge Pro 880 36 inputs x 36 outputs Converge Pro 880T 37 inputs x 38 outputs Converge Pro 880TA 39 inputs x 39 outputs Converge Pro 840T 29 inputs x 30
150. disconnect Command Form DEVICE AD Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 Loop Drop 2 Call Progress 3 Loop Drop Call Progress Null to query in text ADCLIP Audio Clipping This command reports the channels that are currently clipping their audio signals This command is read only This command is implemented only for inputs Command Form DEVICE ADCLIP Values Argument Type Size Values Value Bit Map of 2 Inputs NTC ES gt Input 1 Isb to 12 msb 525225 gt Reserved Null to query in text Bit Map of 2 Outputs MERE gt Output 1 Isb to 13 msb gt Reserved Bit Map of 2 XXXX XXXX Processors caesos uui ent gt Processor A Isb to H msb M 5 Reserved Bit Map of 1 XXXX XXXX Faders gt Faders 1 Isb to 4 msb gt Reserved Bit Map of Telco 1 XXXX gt Telco RX gt Telco TX gt Reserved 228 ADPRESENT Audio Presence This command displays the channels that currently have valid audio signals present This command is read only Command Form DEVICE ADPRESENT Values Argument Type Size Values Value Bit Map of 2 XXXX Inputs gt Input 1 Isb to 12 msb vns
151. display is identical to that shown on the Channel Tab when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane NOTE Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to the channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Mic Input Channels Line Input Channels Telco Rx Channel Output Channels Telco Tx Channel Processing Channels Fader Channels AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation NC Noise Cancellation Filter AGC Automatic Gain Control ALC Automatic Level Control Mic Gating Filters Site Pane Objects Pane 80 AEC ACOUSTIC ECHO CANCELLATION AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation reduces or removes acoustical echo from an input signal thereby improving audio clarity Converge Pro devices perform AEC using the full bandwidth 20hz to 22kHz of the signal AEC uses a reference source to perform AEC based on the acoustic characteristics and dynamics of a specific room Use the AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference tab to set up these references Accessing AEC With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press the AEC button located just below the Pre Gain meter T
152. e and mute for up to two units Control Console allows you to perform basic channel and mixing configuration tasks for all units Accessing Web Builder To access the web builder select Web Builder from the Services menu or press the Web Builder d button on the Console Button Bar Converge Console Site1 cnv BeoemB TT79 53805B 5NHNZ995259 ge ClearOne Ske Selection Channel Matric AECReference Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database asus Maan Ome ie Ou Current Unit Input 1 am p9 t Output 1 CONVERGESS0TA 0 Cire Ss __0 088 gt Ste View Tree View OG Oe e aio o P 2 T v v w Y r 1 t Converge SSO TA Mode Configuration Ste Data Defaut Ill Unt Data Defaut Not Connected Configuring User Console The User Console tab allows you to configure the web version of Dialer a software interface that emulates the functionality of Clearone s Tabletop Controller User Console provides six user programmable keys as described in the following sections 203 C WebBuilder Command Associated with Function Telco Line 1 ME e Eh Zr Command E e Status active State I J Select the key you want to program from the drop down list in the upper left hand corner of the screen Programmable keys include
153. e 225 AAMB Adaptive Ambient Mode onau 225 AARINGS Number of Rings to Auto Answer On 225 ACONN Audible Connect Disconnect Indication 0 0 eese 225 ACONNLVL Audible Connect Disconnect Level 226 AD Auto Disconnect Enable 226 ADCLIP Audio Clipping e 226 ADPRESENT Audio Presence ses 227 AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation Enable Disable 227 AGC Automatic Gain Control es 227 AGCSET Automatic Gain Control sessi es 228 AMBLVL Ambient Level Adjust sss 228 AMXDUET Use AMX Duet Discovery 228 AUDIOMASTER Expansion Bus Audio Master 228 AV Adaptive ese Pese eerte det PERDE ARR UR ER Roc RO We RC e rada 228 AVG Adaptive Volume Gain iius es 229 AVR Adaptive Volume Reference 229 AVRT Adaptive Volume Ratio eese eek eed odd aah dee AA ee IPSA Ad 229 Adaptive Volume Threshold 0 00 s eee 229 BAUD Baud PRO Eee Logie oe E a be wr edu bre e a or des 230 CALLDUR Call D ration issues nun on whi ad pagan baka wen EE E Sex
154. e Ratio Adjust iiissssssssssssssssssssee sess ees 243 GREPORT Gate Report i eie ses ea e eC CR Ca xiu au otra o QC 243 GRPSEL Gating Gro p Select sese ke ee be bea bibere ata 243 HOOKD Hook Flash Duration 0 2 sss 243 223 HOOK Hook Flash 0 00 ee RR RR Ha 243 LABEL Label Iesse cba Adee RR EURO kanes RS EET oko aros 244 LCDCONTRAST LCD Contrast issues 244 LEMO last Mic On MOGS serv cx eee em YA raa eo edo p ex eerta caer 244 LOCALNUM Local N mbert 33 5005 bed extende oto Eee e eb rta 244 LOCBLDG Location 244 LOCCITY Location Cy uc exa eee ep ecd e e RR a ta eee ict ene 245 LOCCNTRY Location Country e 245 LOCCOMP Location 245 LOCREGION Location Region e oro e Rh Ry rre he RE EXE OE EE EE 245 LOCROOM Location ROOM epe ua airi topped AR ER oe ede CRT we T V E RR 245 LOCSITENAME Location Site Argument iiis sessi 245 LOCSTATE Location Stale lt 2 coe pede ce eres der deno Cag OR Ea dg s qut ward 246 LOGMASK Device Log Mask nunana aaa 246 EVE x cea aman es inde eg what oe we haba top ee dei 246 LVLREPORTEN Level Report Enable annuun 247 LVEREPORT Level Report serene es etre x d acelera deb ere els 247 MACRO Macr
155. e ea 154 TABLE OF CONTENTS continued uper PEE ML 157 Event Scheduler Tab iae maet MEERA A Dose 159 Database ns raiat ht 161 Optimizing Selle s uni e e e C Y I va y ea p xt a od a ep CR 166 Dr g Drop oDfIgutellef ss 4 6 tin en ok he X Tg ernest 169 Preset MOG os Y I Y e Ver bare ee Roe PECORA s 175 FIE MENU OVENI mdr nens th Re n A S deat dut at dou os og bo e 182 annis i PLC RII 184 View Ment OVelVieW xxu cxx e ee HORE n RR EY ERROR PEE EE RUP TROC C P bes 185 elei aru ACETUM 187 Connect Menu OVOtVIeW rep NA SEAS C PP Puede oper v E 190 Modes Menu OVerVieW xx Le oed bh ER ree ness d Oa pado 191 Services Ment Dx eo ace fo Chia ER ERU RE 192 Ii 193 laneo CT a eR ERUNT 195 Label zT MTS 197 E 198 Event esie et ACTOR t i not OR ak Sen dcl teen d dig decane eee d as 201 Web BUIGEN 2 rire au cmm ee tana DUE ERE qe EU AER EIER V COP do edat dogs 203 Firmware Loader cas xa te e th dete acim wate eal eo n cedo Bak as d da dete aha dag 208 Debug Consoles s
156. e following sections NC Noise Cancellation Tab Select the Enable Noise Canceller checkbox to enable NC for the channel Adjust the Cancellation Depth slider to the dB setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from to 15 The default is The default for NC is off You can use noise cancellation on all types of input channels See NC Noise Cancellation for more information 109 Telco Settings Tab Settings available on the Telco Settings Tab include Auto Answer Set the number of rings before the unit connects an incoming call or disable the function The default is Disabled Auto Disconnect Select the auto disconnect mode to control when the unit disconnects a connected call Modes include Loop Drop Call Progress Call Progress and Loop Drop and Off The default is Loop Drop Call Progress Ring Type Select from three different ring tones Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 To test a particular tone click Test after you have selected the tone Telco Adaptation Some applications require the unit to adapt to line conditions using a white noise burst Noise rather than automatically Auto The default is Auto Hook Flash Sends a momentary interruption in the line seizure allowing activation of options such as 3 way calling call waiting and call hold This feature is dependent o
157. e signal level when a signal is present Min Max Limits Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min max levels provided relative gain commands are used Channel Routing Matrix The channel routing matrix shows the Matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel Process Ain this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box You can click directly on any cross point box to set a cross point or leave it blank as required for your installation To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl C Paste ctrl The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears as shown below Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB 132 Ene Le c HE A nm NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider Expanded Channel Routing Matrix
158. e the reduction is Command Form DEVICE FEM lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Float 2 0 Locked 1 Unlocked Default 0 FEN Feedback Elimination Nodes Null to query in text This command reports the total number of filter nodes fixed and dynamic currently being used for the feedback cancellation This is a query only command Command Form DEVICE FEN Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 Total Nodes AL WAYS NULL IN TEXT FER Feedback Elimination Node Reset This command resets both the fixed and dynamic filters on the feedback eliminator There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE FER Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 Zero FERNG Feedback Elimination Ring Elimination Mode This command enables disables the Ring Elimination Mode on the feedback eliminator Command Form DEVICE FERNG Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Zero 2 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle 241 Null to query in text FES Feedback Elimination Setup This command reset the feedback elimin
159. e the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider Channel Routing Matrix Inputs Processing Faders In the channel routing matrix pressing the button above an Input Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel Pre Gain Gain Post Gain Post Process Post Gate 36 Coarse 20 Mic 1 56 20 input 50 mpl 4 E 5 5 uud lc ci x 30 Gate sd I NUN ANT Mu me Seve ui ij di d di d ou od d d dn iD d dD d d d g g EEEEEEEEESEEEEEEESS e amp gt a 5 le This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the channel is selected the Tree View pane See Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Processing Settings and Fader Settings for more information You can change the label name of the channel in the Output entry box toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button to mute or un mute the channel and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level
160. ect Export Mic 1 as Podium Mid Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree pane as shown below 101 Objects Podium Mic IR PTT Microphone Sj Line Telco Rx 3j Output 3 Telco Tx i Processing ii Fader Ed 3 8 EH 8 89 For more information on using audio devices and channel objects refer to the Table of Contents for the following topics AV Devices Creating AV Devices Channel Objects Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration Optimizing Input Gain Structure Optimizing gain structure for input channels maximizes the signal to noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance Before configuring an input channel ClearOne recommends that you review the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control Mic Gating Gating Tab Matrix Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration Database Tab Line Input Settings Output Settings 102 LINE INPUT SETTINGS Line Input Settings enable you to customize line input channel settings All settings for a given line input are available on the Channel screen Accessing Line Input Settings With the Channel tab sele
161. ect Connects to a site via USB or IP Disconnect Disconnects Console from the currently connected site This option is not available if no site is connected Refresh Site Refreshes site information displayed in the current Console view This option is not available if no site is connected For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Site Setup Overview Connect To A Site Create A New Site 190 MODES MENU OVERVIEW The Modes Menu allows you to switch Console between Configuration Mode and Preset Mode Configuration Mode allows you to configure a wide range of advanced settings for all models Preset Mode allows you to create presets for specific venues and apply them to instantly to a unit Accessing the Modes Menu Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connext Modes Services TT EG 253 On 000 ge ClearOne cn R um 3 oe Current Unit H0 CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View Palco gt zm ne 3 e40 0 0 Converge 5 90 TA Last Macro O _ LastPresetiO Ste 80CT Unit CONVERGEBGOTA O Device ID Mode Configuration Ste Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut Not Connected _ In Console select Modes from the menu bar The Modes menu appears as shown below UGE Services Help Configuration F5 Preset F6 A bullet indicates the current mode To switch modes s
162. ect Export as Object from the shortcut menu Enter a descriptive object name in the Export Object dialog and click Export to save the object to the database Export Object You can now drag and drop the object onto any channel of the same type to instantly apply the object s configuration settings to the channel NOTE To apply the current channel settings to ALL channels of the same type without saving an object in the database select Apply to all from the shortcut menu when right clicking on the signal flow diagram Menu option not available for Telco Rx or Telco Tx channels 172 _ Export as object To view detailed information about an AV device s configuration settings or to create a custom AV device use the AV Devices pane of the Database tab Advanced Configuration Objects For advanced configuration tasks Console allows you to create and apply Matrix Objects Control Objects Macro Objects and Preset Objects as described in the following sections Matrix Objects Matrix Objects allow you to save customized matrix configurations into the Database and reuse them This enables you to instantly re configure the entire matrix to accommodate changes in conferencing or venue configuration requirements and to rapidly configure additional units using drag and drop configuration To capture the current matrix configuration and save it as a matrix object right click anywhere in the center pane of the matrix screen
163. ect File from the menu bar The File menu appears as shown below Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT Ce 23 ENS mST On 7 ME ClearOne Prez O One i OM Mae Pes MiIC Line wt Current Unit 3 CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View cmi 1011411 11111 lt xXEcc4M2OVO p e o 2 T v v w x x z ze i A Converge de Configuration Ste Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut Not Connected Last Preset 0 Ste 880 Unt CONVERGEBEOTA O Device ID The File menu appears as shown below View Add Connec New Site Open Site Close Site Save Save As Site Properties Print 1 Board Room cvg 2 Sitel cvg 3 Sitel cvg Exit File menu options are explained in the following sections 182 File Menu Site Options The File menu site options allow you to Create a New Site open a saved site with Open Site or close the current site with Close Site File Menu Save Options The File menu save options allow you to Save and Save As a site file File Menu Print Print allows you to create view print and save Site and Unit configuration reports ile Menu Recent File List The File menu recent file list displays the last four Site Files opened The File menu Exit option closes Console To close the current Site without exiting Console use the Close
164. ect Preset from the Modes menu 28554 20 2 22 23 2 25 25 a ees As shown above Console displays the Matrix tab by default in Preset Mode rather than the Unit tab that is the default in Configuration Mode The Site Pane also changes to display the Current Site Current Unit Preset Selection list and the Preset Name Description and Preset Mask entry fields NOTE Clicking a channel label in the matrix displays the Channel tab for the channel Right clicking anywhere in the matrix displays a shortcut menu that allows you to set a cross point copy a cell copy the matrix paste a matrix and clear the matrix 175 Preset Configuration Tabs In preset mode the following tabs are available on the Console Tab Bar for defining preset configurations Unit Tab Channel Tab Matrix Tab AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab Gating Tab Control Tab The channels available for configuration in a preset are determined by the channels selected in the Use in preset row on the matrix tab Rows that are not selected in the matrix are grayed out making them unavailable for preset configuration changes In addition only output channels that have a cross point set in the matrix tab will be available in the preset When you click a check box in the Use in preset row the row becomes active and you can change its routing gating AEC PA Adapt reference and other settings All changes will be saved in the prese
165. ection connecting to the RS 232 port 286 N Contr Description tO It Preset Mask Bi Preset Preset Mask B Preset Preset Mask B Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset ndicator Bit O it 1 ndicator Bit 1 it 2 ndicator Bit 2 Preset Mask Bi ndicator Bit 3 Preset Mask Bi ndicator Bit 4 Preset Mask Bi ndicator Bit 5 Preset Mask Bi ndicator Bit 6 Preset Mask Bi ndicator Bit 7 Preset Mask Bi ndicator Bit 8 Preset Mask Bi t3 t4 t6 Itf t8 9 Preset Indicator Bit 9 Ground 3 3V 300 mA 3 3V 300 mA A ee APPENDIX C FIRMWARE LOADING PROCEDURE Converge Console has detected that the connected Site requires a firmware upgrade If the connected Site contains units that are Version 2 X please remove them from the expansion bus prior to performing the firmware upgrade Please follow the steps below to upgrade the 1 X units to 2 X Step 1 Remove any 2 X units from the stack by disconnecting the expansion bus link cable from the 1 X units Step 2 Re connect to the 1 X stack with Console Step 3 Download the 2 X firmware file to the stack of units Step 4 The units will default and reboot after the download of 2 X firmware The 1 X to 2 X upgrade requires the firmware to be loaded twice to complete the version upgrade Step 5 Reconnect to the stack with Console Download 2 X a second time to the units The units will
166. ed on the Tab Bar select the desired input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press the Filter button located just below the Post Gain meter n Coline M ire Dat Ont tat Corrected BBB BEE ste Goes Unt Cep 0T4D Davee DO _ The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the Filter tab selected as shown below 86 Channel Property Configuration Input 1 The following sections describe how to configure and activate input channel filters Use the Active Filter drop down list to select among active filters Selecting a filter highlights its node on the graph and displays its current settings You can configure up to four active filters per input channel NOTE There are no filters configured by default Press the Add Filter button to create a filter for the input channel When you add a filter it appears in the Active Filter drop down list and on the active filter graph Channet Property Configuration Input 1 In graph view you can click on a filter node and drag it to the desired location on the graph The setting fields immediately reflect changes made by dragging filter nodes 87 Filter Nodes In graph view you can click on a filter node and drag it to the desired location on the graph The setting fields immediately reflect changes made by dragging filter nodes Filter node colors represent the following Green The filter node is selected and active Drag
167. educe echo below the audible level Total Telephone Echo Reduction TTER This meter shows the sum of TERL and TERLE Transmit Input This meter shows the audio level input from the matrix to the telephone line Transmit Output This meter shows the transmit audio level output to the telephone line Receive Input This meter shows the audio level input received from the telephone line Receive Output This meter shows the receive audio level output to the matrix Dialer Button The Dialer button opens the telephone dialer allowing you to place conference calls 111 See the Dialer topic for more information on using the dialer and its features Dial Tone Level Slider The Dial Tone Level slider allows you to set dial tone gain using the slider or selector box The default is zero Range is 12dB to 120 in 1dB increments Recv Boost Slider The Receive Boost slider allows you to set the gain for the incoming telco rx signal This is typically used for low level telephone lines allowing the signal to be boosted to an acceptable level of performance To use Receive Boost check the Recv Boost check box then move the slider to the desired gain settings Recv Boost adds up to 12dB of gain to the signal adjustable in increments from OdB to 12dB The default is Off Recv Input Meter Input 20 112 The Receive Input meter displays the dB level of the incoming telco signal prior to any signal processi
168. ee Preset Control Masking for more information NOTE In most cases macros should not be used in a preset unless you want to run a serial command Some examples that require a macro include querying device status when a preset executes and sending a command string to an external control device to indicate preset room configuration status Also macros execute at the end of a preset after all other routing level and configuration changes included in the preset are completed 9 Press the Save button to save the preset 10 Click the Exit button to exit preset mode and return to configuration mode The preset is now available for execution as described below 178 Executing Presets There are five ways to execute presets Using Console in Configuration Mode Using the LCD Preset Menu on the Front Panel Using control programming and external control devices such as the closure contacts on a room partition Using macros Using serial commands via a Telnet session or via RS 232 ok NOTE Presets only run on the current unit shown in the site pane However you can execute preset on a unit connected to the Expansion Bus by using a macro Executing Presets Using Console Select Execute Preset from the Services menu or press the Execute Preset F button on the button bar Select the preset you want to execute from the Execute Preset dialog that appears and press the Execute button NOTE When executing presets in Console the
169. el 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 P Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 none Compressor 1 4 Group Null to query in text CHAIRO Chairman Override Mode This command selects reports the setting of chairman override Command Form DEVICE CHAIRO Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text 232 CLEAREFFECT Clear Effect Wide Band Telco Emulation This command enables disables or reports the current status of the clear effect Command Form DEVICE CLEAREFFECT lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text CLOCK Clock Set This command sets or reports the current time Command Form DEVICE CLOCK Date Month Year Hours Minutes Seconds Day Argument Type Size Values Units Date Unsigned Integer 1 1 31 Month Unsigned Integer 1 1 12 Year Unsigned Integer 2 2000 2099 NULL to Query in Text Hours Unsigned Integer 1 00 23 Minutes Unsigned Integer 1 00 59 Seconds Unsigned Integer 1 00 59 Day of Unsigned Integer 1 1 Sunday Week 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday COMPDLY Compressor Delay This command sets signal compression delay on a Channel
170. elco Rx i3 Output 8 E F6 ig Telco Line Out ifl Processing ii Fader For more information on using audio devices and channel objects see the following topics AV Devices Creating AV Devices Channel Objects Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration 126 Optimizing Output Gain Structure Optimizing gain structure for output channels ensures optimal audio performance When initially configuring output channels ClearOne recommends that you follow the procedures outlined in the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview Mic Gating Gating Tab Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Telco Rx Settings Optimizing Gain Structure 127 PROCESSING SETTINGS Processing Settings enable you to configure filters delay compression and gain to create precise audio configurations for any venue There are four processing blocks available for the 840T A D and eight for the 880 880T 880TA 8i SR 1212 A H and SR 1212A A H Accessing Processing Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired processing block on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane SOBSUMBES On Current Unit H0 Converge OT AWO The center pane displays a signal processing diagram meters and configuration controls fo
171. elco requirements N Changing this code to a country other than the intended country of operation might cause Converge Pro devices to be non compliant FCC PART 15 ICES 003 COMPLIANCE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada ICES 003 These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by ClearOne Communications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment FCC PART 68 COMPLIANCE US FBIBROOBCONVPRO Ringer Equivalence Number REN 0 0B ac This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules Requirements adopted by ACTA On the mi
172. elect Configuration or Preset Console immediately reflects mode changes NOTE You can also switch modes using the E buttons on the Console Button Bar For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Configuration Mode Preset Mode Console Button Bar 191 SERVICES MENU OVERVIEW The Services Menu provides various utilities for using and managing Converge Converge Pro units Accessing the Services Menu Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT 253 SUBSRREw On 0000 ge ClearOne CO fia ta SNS Maa OS Sa peer pe sa 2 9 9 MICALine 3 t Current Unit CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View fol jl Ite o 2 T v v w Y 1 t L Converge 5 390 1 In Console click Services on the menu bar The Services menu appears as shown below xm Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Web Builder Firmware Loader Debug Console System Checks Execute Preset Run Macro Service Menu Options Options available on the Services menu include Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Firmware Loader 192 DIALER The Dialer provides a software telephone interface for teleconferencing applications NOTE Dialer is only available when Console is connected to a site
173. elects reports the IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETADDR Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text ENETDHCP Ethernet DHCP Selection This command selects reports the use of DHCP of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDHCP Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 0n 2 Toggle Null to query in text ENETDNS Ethernet DNS Selection This command selects reports the use of DNS of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDNS Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text ENETDNSA Ethernet DNS Server Address This command selects reports the DNS server IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDNSA Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text ENETDNSA2 Ethernet DNS Server Address 2 This command selects reports the alternate DNS server IP address of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDNSA2 Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text ENETDOMAIN Ethernet Domain Argument This command selects reports the Domain Argument of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETDOMAIN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value S
174. environment changes Feedback Controls Reset Feedback Eliminator Clicking Reset clears all settings related to this feature Reset Dynamic Nodes Clicking Reset only clears dynamic filters Fixed Filters remain in place Status Reports the number of Fixed and Dynamic nodes A total of 16 nodes can be used regardless of type Node Report Creates a text report listing existing node details Feedback Eliminator Settings Filter Settings Filters are applied according to the specifications the user sets 72 Number of Fixed Filters Up to 16 Fixed Filters are applied If the specified number of filters are not required they become Dynamic Filters Filter Bandwidth Bandwidth is determined by the specified Q factor A lower Q creates a filter that works across a wider frequency range A higher Q utilizes a narrower range Filter Depth Mode Locked re uses filters A replacement filter with new settings and increased filter depth is applied in place of an existing filter Unlocked adds a new filter at a specific frequency No filters are replaced so this setting will count against the total number of filters available Mode Settings Voice and Music presets are available to fine tune the feedback eliminator NOTE Voice Mode is the more aggressive setting Enable Ringing Elimination Allows the Feedback Cancellation to attempt to suppress ringing NOTE This setting adjusts slowly to el
175. er 2 0 repeat off 1 repeat on SIGTOUT Signal Generator Time Out Sets the signal generator time out for the unit Command Form DEVICE SIGTOUT Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Disable Min 1 30 Null to query in text SLVL Speech Level Control This command selects reports the setting of Speech Level Control Command Form DEVICE SLVL Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text SMTPSRV SMTP Mail Server Address This command selects reports the IP address of the SMTP Mail server and the Email Address the unit s SMTP client sends messages to Command Form DEVICE SMTPSRV Value Address Argument Size X Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text 0 0 0 0 Clears IP and String Address String 40 1 40 characters Null to query in text 268 SNMPMNGRIP SNMP Manager Host IP Address This command selects reports the IP address of the SNMP Manager Command Form DEVICE SNMPMNGRIP Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 IP Address of SNMP Manager to send Traps to Null to query in text SNMPMNGRPORT SNMP Manager Notification Port This command selects reports the SNMP Trap port for SNMP Manager Command Form DEVICE SNMPMNGRPORT Value Argument Size Values Units
176. es General The General tab of the Site Properties window displays Site file information as shown above Enter a site name file 54 author and site description in the Site Info section of the tab Press OK to save the changes Cancel to close the Site Properties window or click on the Management or Time Local tabs to continue site configuration Site Properties Management Tab The Management tab shown below enables you to configure SNMP parameters email notification settings as well as user names and passwords Site Properties ctsite2 General Management Time Local Control Master Unit HO CONVERGES8BOT A0 SNMP Manager IP amp ddress Manager Port jo 0 0 0 f 62 Write Communi Read Communi private public Email Notifications SMTP Server Address Resolved SMTP Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Email Address Username Passwords Edit Administrator Username Password Edit Manager Username Password Edit User Username Password Control Master Unit All units in the site appear in the Control Master unit list Selecting a Control Master unit designates that unit to control the SNMP interactions for the entire site across IP based networks To use SNMP the Control Master unit s must be connected to the LAN via IP All other units in the site are Control Slave units Control Slave units report events to the Control Master Unit for SNMP reporting and SMTP email notifications
177. es Help TT EC 33 SOBSERED 9u ge ClearOne I ed TEM m sut MICALine ut Current Unit CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View mmus iu e s n 3 240 0 42 Converge 9072 de Configuration Ste Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut M Not Connected From the Console main screen click on the Services menu and select Execute Preset as shown below x Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Web Builder Firmware Loader Debug Console System Checks Run Macro N Macro Record F8 The Execute Preset dialog appears as shown below Execute Preset Select Preset 216 Select the preset you want to run from the drop down list then click Execute to run the preset or Cancel to return to Console You can also use macros to execute presets or multiple presets simultaneously For more information see the Macro Tab topic For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Preset Mode Services Menu Configuration Mode Preset Mode Overview Macro Tab 217 NENNEN D APPENDIX A SERIAL COMMAND GUIDE TYPE AND DEVICE IDS Converge Converge Pro Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows Device Type Device ID Range 880 1 0 B TH20 2 0 F 840T 3 0 B 8i A 0 B 880T D 0 B 880TA H 0 B SR 1212 G 0 B SR 1212A
178. es Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Short 2 80 00 to 0 00 Null to query in text 231 BAUD Baud Rate This command selects reports the baud rate of the serial port Command Form DEVICE BAUD Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Null to query in text CALLDUR Call Duration This command returns current call duration If no call is active this command returns 0 At the time of call termination this command will automatically be sent out to report call duration This command is read only Command Form DEVICE CALLDUR Channel Duration Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 Reserved 2 0 Duration String 8 String of format HR MN SS CALLERID Reports Caller ID Information This command reports Caller Identification Information This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set Command Form DEVICE CALLERID Channel Number Argument Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved Unsigned Integer 2 0 Number String 16 1 16 chars Label String 16 1 16 chars CGROUP Compressor Group Select This command selects reports the setting of the compressor group Command Form DEVICE CGROUP Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Chann
179. es alae 230 CALLERID Reports Caller ID Information 0 000 000 000 230 CGROUP Compressor Group Select se 230 CHAIRO Chairman Override 230 CLEAREFFECT Clear Effect Wide Band Telco 231 CLOCK Clock Set ess s 231 COMPDLY Compressor Delay issiasskemaa bet ex ERAS d RR ERR ERRARE RE PR EET ad 231 COMPDLYEN Compressor Delay Enable 231 COMPRESS Compressor Adjust es 232 COMPSEL Compression Select esse 232 COUNTRY Country Selection es 232 CTRLMASTER Control Master Mode noaa 232 DEGAY Decay Adj S bett tyda e bd Re he eod ac t Peri i diede 233 DEFAULT Default The Unit e e 233 DELAY Delay Adjust esses es 233 DELAYSEL Delay Select ios be REPERI RE 233 DEVICENAME Argument Identification Label sese 233 DEVICESUBTYPE Sets the Subtype of a Connected 234 DEVICETYPE Sets the Type of a Connected Device 234 DFLTM Default Meter sse e 234 DIAG Diagnostic Commands 0 eee ees 234 222 DIAL Dialing ire RR
180. eter are as close to 6dB and the average level is as close to OdB as possible 5 Repeat the above steps for each mic input in the venue NOTE The Post Gain Meter is a peak meter If the meter remains green the level may be too low If it peaks into red clipping occurs 166 Optimizing Gain for Line Input Channels Line inputs are optimized using the same procedure as mic inputs with the following exceptions Select the Line Input you want to optimize on the Tree View Tab With the line source connected monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level NOTE Line sources including video codecs consumer grade CD players DVD players and VCRs commonly require 10 12 dB of gain to bring their levels up to 0 dBu Optimizing Gain for Telco Rx Channels Optimize telco rx inputs using the same procedure as mic inputs with the following exceptions Select Telco Rx on the Tree View Tab With someone talking on the phone monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level Optimizing Gain for Telco Tx Channels Optimize telco tx outputs using the same procedure as output channels with the following exceptions Select Telco Tx on the Tree View Tab With someone speaking into the microphones routed to the telco tx monitor the Post Gain Meter and adjust the gain level NOTE Use a standard handset on the far end because levels can be unpredictable from speaker phones and amplified headsets Optimizing Gain for Output Channels 1
181. eter that updates when a receive only signal is present ERLE Echo Return Loss Enhancement Meter Shows the loss through the echo cancellation and non linear processing chain the difference of the two levels This is an average meter that updates when a receive only signal is present 82 ERL ERLE Meter Shows the total ERL and ERLE reduction This is an average meter that updates only when a receive only signal is present PTT Push to Talk Mode Select the Enable Push to Talk Mode checkbox to enable PTT PTT notifies AEC when a microphone is switched off and freezes AEC convergence until the microphone is switched back on As a result PTT helps prevent AEC divergence and improves overall AEC performance with push to talk microphones When the microphone is off set the PTT Threshold slider to the level of the Pre Gain Meter for the channel For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation Mic Gating Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings 83 NC NOISE CANCELLATION NC Noise Cancellation is a process in which ambient background noise is removed from an input signal with no noticeable degradation in signal quality NC is available on Mic Input excluding SR 1212 and SR 1212A and Telco Rx channels Accessing NC With the Channel tab selec
182. ets the EQ Level for ALL bands in the filter bank There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Zero 2 Zero PAEQSET PA EQ Filter Set This command sets reports the EQ Level for a given band in the filter bank Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN Channel Group Band Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Band Unsigned 2 1 32 25 Hz Hz Short 2 62 5Hz 3 125 0 Hz 4 250 0 Hz 5 500 0 Hz 6 1000 0 Hz 7 2000 0 Hz 8 4000 0 Hz 9 8000 0 Hz 10 16000 0 Hz Value Signed 4 12 00 12 00 dB Float Null to query in text 257 PAFLT PA Fault This indicates one of the power amplifier channels is in a FAULT condition This is Read Only and is automatically generated if a fault occurs Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN Bitmap Argument Type Size Values Bitmap Hexadecimal Integer 4 1 30 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 m Frame Sync Fault P Power Fault UART Fault DSP Memory Fault mp 2 Fault 1 Fault IZC Fault Fan Controller Fault SPI Fault Bits 09 31 unused PAIMPED PA Output Impedance This command selects the output impedance for the PA channel to be either 8 ohms or 70 100V Command Form DEVICE PIAMPED Channel lt Group gt Value Argument
183. events press the Event Scheduler Tab on the Tab Bar in Console Converge Console Site1 cnv F e View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT ce 25 SORBSUBSE ge ClearOne unt channel matric AECReference Macro Gating Contro string Event Scheauer Database j Command Editor Command Description Argument Description No command specified i Type DD Command ze I Time Scheduler 1219 2008 X zoom Scheduled Events A Unt Data Defaut NotConected LastMaco 0 Preset 0 Ste Skew Unt CONVERGEGSOTA 0 Device 01 Scheduling Events Events must be scheduled and run on the local device However commands can be sent from events to other devices in the site using Macros Use the following procedure to schedule events 1 In the Command Editor section of the screen select command from the Command drop down list The command description appears in the Command Description box parameters appear next to the Command drop down list and the valid values for each parameter appear in the Argument Description box Command Editor Command Description Argument Description es mte Value Oto set the state to off 1 to set the state to on and 2 to toggle the state The commands available for event scheduling include MACRO Executes a macro PRESET Executes a preset RESET Resets the specified device 159 SFTYMUTE Mutes all channels on the specified
184. ew site file select the Create New Document and Connect to Site radio button To pull data from the unit to the current Site File select the Pull Data from Unit to Current Document radio button only available if a site file is open To push data from the current site file to the unit select the Connect to Site and Push Document radio button only available if a site file is open the unit is added To connect via USB select the USB Connection radio button To connect via IP select the IP Connection radio button and select a unit from the Available Addresses drop down list or enter an IP address in the Enter Address entry box Press the Connect button to connect to the site or Cancel to close the dialog NOTE The default login user name is ClearOne The default password is Converge User names and passwords are not case sensitive Disconnect from a Site ee To disconnect from a site press the Disconnect button on the Console Button Bar or select Disconnect from the Connect menu Answer Yes to the Confirm dialog that appears or No to cancel 52 For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Site File Overview Site Properties Unit Communication IP Settings SITE PROPERTIES Site Files are created and modified using the Site Properties window in Console Site files contain all information about a particular installation including properties for all units in a site For
185. exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the min max levels Channel Routing Matrix Faders The channel routing matrix shows the Matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected channel Fader 1 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box Fader1 112 4 5 1 5 2 e e of1 2 2 9 992 9989299g222222822282228282332z2z227 RERRRRRRRLIIIISISSSSSSSRRPIEEER m m m m m m m m m di mox c cL LE e dnd e ordei You can click directly on any cross point box to set a cross point or leave it blank as required for your installation Cross Point Enter Ctrl C Ctrl V menu The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is 137 NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider Expanded Channel Routing Matrix Pow Gain e I3uB52 8 This display is identical to that shown on the Channel tab when the channel is selected in the Tree View pane You can change the label name of the channel
186. ext Group Group 1 1 3 7 l M L Type Unsigned Integer 2 1 Pink Noise 2 White Noise 3 Tone Amplitude Signed Float 4 60 00 20 00 dB Frequency Unsigned Float 4 Type 1 2 0 Null in text Hz Type 3 20 00 20000 00 SIGGENEN Signal Generator Enable This command selects reports of the signal generator activation Command Form DEVICE SIGGENEN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 20n 2 Toggle Null to query in text 267 SIGGENSWEEP Signal Generator Sweep This command starts the signal generator with a tone and does a sweep If Repeat is 0 the signal generator will turn off after the sweep If Repeat is 1 the signal generator will turn off after signal generator timeout To stop the sweep send a SIGGENEN command with a 0 During the sweep the box will send out updated SIGGEN commands Command Form DEVICE SIGGENSWEEP Channel Group Amplitude Start Frequency End Frequency lt Increment Frequency Rate lt Repeat gt Argument Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 8 7 Amplitude Signed Float 2 60 00 20 00 dB Start Unsigned Float 4 20 00 20000 00 Hz Frequency End Unsigned Float 4 20 00 20000 00 must be greater than the Hz Frequency start Increment Unsigned Float 4 1 00 20000 00 Hz Frequency Rate Unsigned Integer 2 10 2000 ms Hz Repeat Unsigned Integ
187. family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use Part 2 Immunity Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Radiated RF Immunity Electrical Fast Transients Immunity Lightning Surge Immunity Conducted RF Immunity Voltage Dips and Voltage Interruptions Safety 73 23 EEC Low Voltage Directive LVD EN 60065 2002 Audio video and similar electronic apparatus Safety requirements RoHS 2002 95 EC amp 2005 618 EC Restriction of the Use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment EEE amp WEEE 2002 96 EC Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment EEE herein certify that the products listed above are in compliance with the EU directive 2002 95 EC and EU directive 2002 96 EC I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards Date of Issue February 13 2009 Legal Representative in Europe s Greg A LeClaire Signature Greg A LeClaire CFO 308 NEW ZEALAND COMPLIANCE In the event of main power failure Converge Converge Pro equipment will become inoperable with regard to making telephone calls All persons using Converge Converge Pro equipment for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law which requires that at least one party to the conversation be aware that the conversation is being recorded In addition the principles enumerate
188. fications to maintain uninterrupted service This equipment uses an RJ11C jack that is used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network This RJ11C jack complies with the applicable FCC Part 68 Rules and Requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See installation instructions for details 303 If you experience problems with this equipment contact ClearOne Communications 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 Salt Lake City Utah 84116 or by phone at 800 945 7730 for repair and warranty information If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved No user serviceable parts are contained in this product If damage or malfunction occurs contact ClearOne Communications for instructions on its repair or return Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment
189. for look ahead compression functionality Delay from 0 20 msec Command Form DEVICE COMPDLY Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 20 msec Null to query in text COMPDLYEN Compressor Delay Enable This command enables signal compression delay on a Channel for look ahead compression functionality Command Form DEVICE COMPDLYEN Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle 233 Null to query in text COMPRESS Compressor Adjust This command selects reports the settings of the compressor Command Form DEVICE COMPRESS Channel Threshold Ratio Attack Release Gain Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 P Threshold Signed Integer 1 60 20 Null to query in text Ratio Unsigned Integer 1 1 20 Attack Unsigned Float 2 0 00 100 00 Ms Release Unsigned Integer 2 100 2000 Ms Gain Unsigned Float 4 0 00 20 00 dB COMPSEL Compression Select This command selects reports the compressor activation Command Form DEVICE COMPSEL Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 P Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Nu
190. forcement and room combining applications In addition to improved audio performance enhanced management and simplified configuration the SR1212 offers industry leading expansion capabilties to accomodate virtually any size venue Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage 0 56aB in 7 increments Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four internal amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual gating groups 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a sin
191. g the desktop icon or by clicking the Start button in Windows and selecting All Programs ClearOne Communications Converge Console Converge Console from the program list After Console loads you can open an existing Site File from the File menu or create a new site file by selecting New Site When a site file is opened Console displays the Unit Tab as shown below Default User ID and Password Connecting to a site with Console requires a user name and password The default user name is clearone the default password is converge NOTE User names and passwords are not case sensitive ClearOne recommends that you record user names and passwords and store them in a secure place There is no way to retrieve passwords If you forget a password the only way to connect to the device is to Default the unit After connecting you can add modify user IDs change passwords and set access privileges using the Site Properties dialog Navigating Converge Console Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connext Modes Servies Help TT 33 SOBSERES Oa p ClearOne aec Rererence mocro osea cona sting evene MS Pres AEC Ni One f NOM Mite Pres Output Current Unit o CONVERGESROTA 0 Ste View Tree View pale fol ILA e r v v w x x D 4 0 c de Configuration Ste Data Defaut U
192. ge Converge Pro database To capture the currently displayed control pin programming right click in the Control Status Pin Select portion of the of the Control Tab screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu After saving the control port object it appears in the Objects pane on the right side of Console For more information about objects see Creating Channel Objects Matrix Objects Macro Objects and Drag amp Drop Configuration For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Expansion Bus Controls and Connections Device IDs DIDs String Tab 156 STRING TAB The String Tab enables you to create up to eight command strings that allow Converge Converge Pro units to control external devices such as lighting projectors and room dividers Command strings are written using the syntax of the external device being controlled Converge Converge Pro devices pass command strings to external devices through the RS 232 port Accessing the String Tab To create command strings press the String tab on the Tab Bar in Console Command 6 Ste Osta Good M Unt bata Good Corrected _ BEEBEBSEN 2e toydim Unt Cnvegsi4i 0 Deco ID You can create up to eight serial command strings limit 80 characters each on the String screen The following sections explain how to create and run command strings Command String Special Characters The following character comb
193. gether Macros can be executed from within Converge Console using serial commands and within Presets Manual Gating Provides the ability to gate a microphone on or off manually See also Gating Matrix Mixer The Converge Pro mixer that allows routing of any input or combination of inputs to an output or any combination of outputs The Converge Pro mixer permits level control at each cross point in the matrix See also Cross Point Maximum Number of Mics Sets the maximum number of mics that can be gated on simultaneously MIB Management Information Base A database file that describes networked communication devices for SNMP management purposes See also SNMP Microphone Mixing The process which mixes audio signals from different microphones All mic signals can be mixed into one signal any or all outputs or mixed into separate groups Microphone signals can also be processed together or individually Min Max Gain Level Yellow and green limit arrows in Console that set minimum and maximum gain levels respectively for all channels These arrows are available on the Gain Slider for each channel type Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and are used to prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels Mixer Mode The matrix mixer in Console has two settings master and slave Mixer mode is configured in the Unit Properties window See also Matrix Mixer and Unit Properties 313 Mute A condition in w
194. ging a green node changes the gain setting for PEQ filters and the frequency for all filter types Grey The filter node is selected but not active White The filter node is not selected and not active Black Dragging a black filter node changes bandwidth settings for Notch and PEQ filter types Adding Filters To add additional filters click the Add Filter button The number of remaining available filters for the channel is shown under Filters Remaining Filter Types Use the Type drop down list to select from the following input filters All Pass Frequency range is 20 00Hz to 20 00kHz All pass changes the phase of the audio signal at the set frequency e High Pass Selectable frequency cutoff is 20 00Hz to 20 00kHZz Rolloff is 12dB octave Level is fixed at e Low Pass Selectable frequency cutoff is 20 00Hz to 20 00kHz Rolloff is 12dB octave Level is fixed at OdB Notch Center frequency range is 20 00Hz to 20 00kHz Bandwidth is from 05 to 5 00 octaves in 01 octave increments Level is fixed at 80dB e PEQ Parametric Equalizer Center frequency range is 20Hz to 20kHz with resolution to 1Hz or 4 places whichever is larger Bandwidth is 05 to 5 octaves in 01 octave increments Level range is 15 to 15dB in 0 5dB increments Frequency Available for all filter types Use the Frequency selector box to set the center frequency in Hertz for the filter you are configuring Range is from 20Hz to 20kH
195. gle command 11 Converge Pro SR1212 The successor to ClearOne s PSR1212 the SR1212 is a 12x12 digital matrix mixer that is the ideal solution for sound reinforcement and room combining applications In addition to improved audio performance enhanced management and simplified configuration the SR1212 offers industry leading expansion capabilties to accomodate virtually any size venue Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage 0 56 in 7 increments Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Eight microphone gating groups four internal amp four global allow separation of microphones into individual gating gr
196. gs Fader Settings Telco Tx Settings Telco Rx Settings Pwr Amp LCD SETTINGS MENU The LCD Settings Menu allows you to configure serial port settings and Device IDs view network IP settings change the LCD contrast level and restore factory default settings for a unit Accessing the Settings Menu To access the Settings menu press the Select button on the front panel use the Menu Dial to select Settings and press the Select button The Settings menu appears as shown below Settings menu options include RS 232 Network DID Default Contrast 37 These options are described in the following sections RS 232 There are two parameters in the RS 232 menu Baud Rate and Flow Control To change these settings use the following procedure Use the Menu Dial to highlight Baud Rate or Flow Control Press the Select button Select the desired value using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to set the selected value Press the Esc button to return to the Settings menu BRONZ You can also use the Comm tab of the Unit Properties screen to change these settings Baud Rate This parameter allows you to set the baud rate to 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps 57 6kbps or 115 2kbps The default is 57 6 kbps Select the baud rate you want to use then press the Select button A message appears on the LCD display indicating the change is in progress and another indicating the change is complete When finished the display
197. gument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 On 1 Off 2 Toggle Null to query in text FEB Feedback Elimination Bandwidth This command sets the filter bandwidth of the notch filter Options are a 5 or Q 10 Command Form DEVICE FEB lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J 239 Value Unsigned Short 2 0 5 1210 Default 0 5 Null to query in text FEDR Feedback Elimination Dynamic Node Reset This command will reset only the dynamic filters on the feedback eliminator There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE FEDR lt CHANNEL gt lt GROUP gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Zero 2 Value 0 16 Nodes Null to query in text FEF Feedback Elimination Fixed Filter This command sets the number of fixed filter to use in the feedback eliminator The fixed filters number will be used during the initialization phase when gain is increased until feedback occurs A fixed filter will be set at the feedback point during the initialization Command Form DEVICE FEF lt CHANNEL gt GROUP VALUE Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Unsigned Short 2 Zero FEG Feedback Elimination Auto
198. h allows you to select from a list of custom channel objects and instantly apply them to a specific channel type AV Devices and channel Objects are stored in the Database Status Bar Mode Configuration Site Data Good Unt Data Goods Corrected MN MN Ste SRe1 Unt Convergs040T 03 Device ID 4 The Status Bar displays the current Console Mode as well as connection status site information and unit information The LEDs in the Status Bar indicate current status as follows Clear no LEDs illuminated Not connected Yellow Connecting pending Green Connected Red Off line Purple Current with error Console Modes Console has two modes Configuration Mode and Preset Mode Configuration Mode allows you to configure a wide range of advanced settings for your unit s Preset Mode allows you to create presets for specific venues and apply them instantly to Converge Converge Pro unit s For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics LCD Programming Site Properties Configuration Mode Overview Preset Mode Overview 48 SITE FILE OVERVIEW Site Files allow you to store configuration settings for one or more units for a specific application or venue Site files also provide Console with the necessary information to communicate with the Converge Converge Pro devices using your PC Site files are a powerful tool for creating a library of configuration files for specific app
199. hannel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group il 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 3 6 9 or 12 dB Null to query in text 266 RXBSTEN Receive Boost Enable This command selects reports the receive boost status Command Form DEVICE RXBSTEN Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text SERECHO Serial Echo This command selects reports the serial echo of the RS 232 port Command Form DEVICE SERECHO Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text NOTE The unit will return the updated state of the last selection in the same form as the command SFTYMUTE Safety Mute This command selects reports the state of the safety mute Safety mute holds all outputs in a muted state It used for syncing to a site document to avoid feedback or blown speakers until the unit is in a settled state Command Form DEVICE SFTYMUTE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Channel 4 0 off 1 on 2 toggle Null to query in text SIGGEN Signal Generator This command selects reports of the signal generator activation Command Form DEVICE SIGGEN Channel Group Type Amplitude Frequency Argument Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Null to query in t
200. hannels Group Group 1 1 2 3 7 O M L Value Unsigned Integer 2 NULL to query in text DFLTM Default Meter This command selects reports the setting of the default meter on the front panel Command Form DEVICE DFLTM Channel Group Position Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Null to query in text Group Group 1 1 2 3 7 16 17 1 O ML T R Position Meter Type 2 1 4 as applicable for group See Meter Type Definitions DIAG Diagnostic Commands This command is used to return status and diagnostic information It is intended to be used as a text command only This is a query only command Command Form DEVICE DIAG Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 0 List of current commands Short J Power Amp 1 Fan Temp 2 Noise Gate 3 Feedback Nodes Information String 80 Diagnostic String AL WAYS NULL IN TEXT 236 DIAL DTMF Dialing This command dials a DTMF sequence or reports back the last sequence dialed Command Form DEVICE DIAL Channel Number Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Reserved 2 0 Number String 40 1 40 Chars of 0 9 S Null to query last number dialed in text DID Device ID This command reports the device id This command is read only except thr
201. he Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the AEC tab selected see below 81 Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC AGCIALC NC Gating Fiter V Enable Push to Tak Mode Pre Gan i Threshold 0 The AEC tab shows a signal flow diagram for AEC and has the following features Enable AEC PA Adapt and AEC Reference NLP Non linear Processing and PTT Push to Talk mode These features are described in the following sections Enable AEC Checkbox Select the checkbox to enable AEC PA Adapt and AEC Reference Button This button displays the expansion bus output channel currently used as the AEC reference for the selected channel Clicking the button closes the Channel Property Configuration window and opens the AEC Reference tab in the center pane of Console NLP Non Linear Processing Radio Buttons NLP increases the power of echo cancellation for difficult acoustical environments NLP features four settings Soft Medium Aggressive Off The default is soft NOTE Use NLP with care There are corresponding trade offs associated with NLP including suppression and half duplex operation The AEC tab also includes meters for Echo Return Loss ERL Echo Return Loss Enhancement ERLE and Total Echo Reduction ERL ERLE ERL Echo Return Loss Meter Shows the coupling between the reference signal and the input to the echo canceller the difference of the two levels This is an average m
202. he Channel tab enables you to configure gating control for individual Mic Input channels and assign them to Gating Groups There are two types of gating for Mic Input channels Auto Gating and Manual Gating For more information about Gating Groups see the Gating Tab section Accessing Channel Gating Configurations With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press the Gate button located just below the Post Process meter de Congue Ste Data Dea M recen M tat Corrected BENIN Ste Gow Room Unt Convergeb4UT 0 Deve ID 0 The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the Gating tab selected OCS m p mrt mee voies LES ates hot L Gia e oo E Use the radio buttons to select Auto Gating Manual On or Manual Off which are described in the sections below 93 Gating Settings Auto Gating The upper section of the Gate Settings section of the screen contains the gating controls for Auto Gating as shown below Settings Ambient Tracking Processing Functions Ratio x G Adaptive Ambient Chairman Override 030 2 12048 ont Attenuation Manusi FV PA Adoptive Mode m PA and u aac noterce Reference Output 8 Auto Gating Auto Gating Settings Gate Ratio Specifies how much louder than the ambient level the audio level must be
203. he level for the test tone using the dB entry field or up down arrows Set desired test tone duration using the Signal Timeout entry field For Tone signals set the additional Frequency settings as explained in the next section Press the Signal On button to initiate the test signal on the selected unit and channel The signal will 212 continue using the specified settings until the Signal Timeout is reached or the Signal On button is pressed again whichever occurs first Tone Frequency Settings Configure Frequency settings for tone tests as follows 1 Select a tone frequency using the Frequency slider or enter a frequency in the entry box 2 Alternatively use the Auto Sweep button to sweep a range of frequencies using the Begin Frequency End Frequency Increment and Rate settings Select the Repeat checkbox if you want the sweep to continue in cycles NOTE Use auto sweep to test the frequency response of a room and speakers and to identify distortion or rattles produced by the speakers or speaker housings Auto sweep moves the frequency of the signal generator from a low frequency to a high frequency at the specified rate The Frequency slide control and readout reflect progress while the sweep is in progress Sweep range is 20Hz 20kHz increment range is 1Hz 20kHz and the rate range is 10ms 2000ms The default rate is 100ms 3 Press the Signal On button to generate the tone test signal or press the Auto Sweep button to in
204. he outputs for each virtual reference source you want to define In the example above Output 7 is connected to the room amplifier This audio includes microphones that cannot be included in the AEC reference so Output 7 should not be used directly as the AEC reference source Instead use a 145 Virtual Reference and route any inputs that you want cancelled to that reference This typically would include Telco RX audio and audio from a video codec Input 5 above which in this example are combined to create Virtual Reference 1 NOTE If the channels selected for a virtual reference use Processing or Faders you should select the processing or fader channel as the virtual reference source This provides the AEC process with the most accurate reference for the signal thereby providing faster convergence and more accurate AEC performance Expansion Bus Reference Sources Expansion Ref 1 Unit eo Converged40T 03 Output Output 1 m Clear Use the Expansion References 1 8 section of the screen to use audio from an expansion bus channel as the AEC PA Adapt reference source For each expansion reference select the Unit and the Output you want to use as a reference using the drop down lists The following types of sources are available for use as expansion AEC PA Adapt reference sources Output channels Speakers Virtual references PA Virtual References A PA Virtual Reference assigns audio from a given amp out
205. he site As shown above site data errors and unit data errors are indicated by magenta and red LEDs respectively Complete unit configuration with correct settings to clear the errors When correct configuration is complete the status LEDs will change to green The Status bar also displays Last Macro and Last Preset 188 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Unit Properties Create A New Site Connect To A Site Site Properties Unit Tab Configuration Mode Overview 189 CONNECT MENU OVERVIEW The Connect Menu enables you to connect to a site disconnect from a site and refresh the current display for a site Connecting to a site allows you to control and configure the units in that site See Site Setup Overview for more information Accessing the Connect Menu Converge Console Site1 cnv View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT EG SOBSEBEe Oa 77 m ClearOne Co gpEEESEES TIE WIESEN T EDT fw EC N Pres MiC Line MOM Mae Ga Output T Output 1 Current Unit CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View Palco jl e s n 3 240 90 2 Converge 5 Mode Configuration Ste Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut Not Connected _ In Console select Connect from the menu bar The Connect menu appears as shown below Connect Connect Disconnect Refresh Site Connect Menu Options Conn
206. her the Site View tab or the Tree View tab of the Site View pane or select the unit type you want to add from the Add menu on the Menu Bar as shown below Add Connect Modes 5 Converge 840T Converge 880 Converge TH20 Converge 8i Converge 880T Converge SR1212 Converge 880TA Converge SR12124 The Unit Properties window appears Unit Properties settings are described in the following sections Unit Properties General Tab The Unit ID and MAC Address for the selected unit are automatically displayed at the top of the Info section of the tab When connected the firmware version dictionary version and DSP date versions are displayed in the Versions section at the bottom of the tab when connected These settings cannot be modified Device Name Enter a descriptive name in the Device Name field Device names are used as network identifier on NetBIOS networks They must start with a letter and can contain both letters and numbers with a maximum length of 15 59 characters No special characters are allowed except for Device ID Select a Device ID from the Device ID drop down list Device IDs ensure that Console synchronizes with the proper unit when there are multiple units of the same type in a site Therefore each unit of the same type in a site must have a unique Device ID assigned using the front panel LCD Settings menu All units ship from the factory with a default DID of 0 Device Types and Device IDs by model are as follows
207. hich an audio signal is attenuated below the audible threshold NLP Non Linear Processing NLP increases the power of echo cancellation for difficult acoustical environments NLP has four settings Soft 6dB Medium 12dB Aggressive 18dB and Off NLP settings are found in the Channel Properties Configuration window for Mic Input channels Noise Cancellation A process which removes ambient noise from a signal NTP Network Time Protocol Part of the IP protocol suite NTP is used for clock synchronization between devices on IP based networks NOM Number of Open Mics Constant Gain Mode Adjusts the output level to maintain a specified gain level based on the number of mics gated on and routed to an output I R Buses These ten audio buses are used for routing microphone audio between Converge Pro devices Information about the number of gated microphones NOM count and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses See also S Z Buses and PA Adapt AEC Reference Bus Off Attenuation The amount of level reduction a microphone is given when the microphone is not gated on PA Adaptive Mode PA Adaptive Mode allows you to specify an output as the ambient reference This prevents an audio signal from gating on microphones without interfering with speech from conference participants PA Adapt AEC Reference This setting determines which output channel typically a loudspeaker is used as the
208. hooting purposes NOTE The device log can store 256K bytes of data Once this limit is reached the first 128K of data is truncated and logging resumes Accessing Device Log ay To access the device log select Device Log from the Services menu or click the Device Log button on the Console Button Bar Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT 33 SOBSURBED Oa coo ClearOne Ee Selection cannet AEC Reterence macro cating contro string Event Scheduler Database Ome mem CEN CONNECT Current Unit pot o t Output 1 CONVERGE80TA 0 Ste View Tree View dc e e KT IER o P 2 T v w Converge 198 Using Device Log In the Device Log window select the events you want to log using the Event Selection check boxes Device Log Events available for logging include Reset Reports unit reset events Errors Reports internal unit errors Access Reports all web Telnet front panel and USB access events System Checks Reports the pass fail status of System Checks Firmware Download Reports firmware downloads Default Reports unit default events Safety Mute Reports safety mute events Macro Reports Macro execution events Preset Reports when Presets are run Audio Clipping Reports audio clipping events Telco On Off Reports when the tel
209. ied in dB decibels On Converge Pro devices gain is adjustable from 65 to 20dB 85dB range in 5dB increments Gain Structure A set of configuration parameters that define the gain characteristics of a signal The optimal input gain setting is one which provides both an adequate signal to noise ratio and reasonable headroom Gateway A device used to provide external network access to client devices on IP networks All traffic with IP addresses outside the specified subnet mask are automatically routed to the gateway See also DHCP and Subnet Mask Gating The activation and deactivation of mic inputs Converge Pro provides three types of microphone gating 312 Auto The microphone will gate on according to the input level assigned gating parameters and gating group Manual On The microphone will gate on unless it exceeds the NOM requirements of the gating group Manual Off The microphone is deactivated Gate Ratio Specifies how much louder the microphone audio level must be over the ambient sound level before a microphone gates on Gating Controls The gating parameters that are assigned to a gating group including Maximum Number of Mics Sets the maximum number of mics that can be gated on simultaneously First Mic Priority Increases the audio level required to gate on additional microphones after the first mic is gated on Last Mic Mode Sets the last activated mic to Last On Mic 1 8 or Off Gating Groups A set of gati
210. iew Tree View B ve 1234 ABCDEF j reeeererre ivo PICS NX amp gt LL LET roa LL Gating Groups ooo Tere Jr unun ccocceccccoccoc ccccecccoccocc cecocceccrececco th Un un On Creer eererercrer s 1 a on jon w jot fron D v L4 L4 L4 v Mode Configuration Ske Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut Net Connected Gating configurations are shown in the Center Pane The following sections describe how to configure gating groups Gating Controllers Gating Cortrolers None 1234 ABCOEF gt r cerecerrcrce invo Contigare r cCorcecrcee Congas r Contre r core eerccccoc Bn vc Configure r Use the Gating Controllers section of the screen to assign Mic Inputs to a gating group Use Internal gating 151 groups radio buttons 1 4 to control mic inputs connected to the unit currently selected in the Site Pane Use Global gating groups radio buttons A F to control mic inputs connected to the current unit as well as all units connected to the E Bus Press the Configure button to display and modify individual channel Gating configurations using the Channel Properties Configuration screen Internal Gating Groups Internal Gating Groups GroupName Gros First Mic Pr
211. ignated frequency ranges of an audio signal to specified loudspeaker elements in a sound system Converge Pro provides the following types of crossovers Bessel A crossover using a low pass filter design characterized by a linear phase response This results in a constant time delay throughout the passband Butterworth A crossover using a low pass filter design characterized by a maximally flat magnitude response This results in no amplitude ripple in the passband Linkwitz Riley A fourth order crossover consisting of a cascaded second order Butterworth low pass filter Offers a vast improvement over the Butterworth crossover and is the de facto standard for professional audio active crossovers Cross Point The intersection between an input and an output in the routing matrix Cross point cells are color coded according to input type yellow gated blue non gated brown pre AEC green cross point See also Gating Pre AEC Channel Cross Point Level Adjust The process of adjusting the audio level gain attenuation at the cross point Cross Point Levels are set using the Cross Point Attenuation Slider which allows you attenuate the signal from 0 to 60dB it also allows you to add gain to the signal from 0 to 12dB Decay Rate Determines how fast a mic input channel gates off after the specified Hold time expires slow medium fast The default is medium Default Meter The input output level meter displayed on the front panel
212. iguration Mode Overview 57 UNIT PROPERTIES Unit Properties define properties for a specific Converge Converge Pro unit Unit Properties enable you to configure general unit settings such as name and telephone country code as well as IP and serial communication settings Properties that apply to all units in a site are configured using Site Properties Accessing Unit Properties To access the Unit Properties window right click the unit you want to configure in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab of the Site Pane in Console Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Conmect Modes Services TIT BOSSA E ene Site Selection Current Unit H0 CONVERGESS0TA 0 Ste View Tree View rr e 80 FS ZErKY N lt xgcC4H2000 p gt zm ne 3 ec40 0 0 L LLLLI LLL LL LL LL E Pet Dest ed Det bet et de Configuration Site Data Defaut Unit Data Defaut Not Connected The Site Unit menu appears Select Unit Properties as shown below Copy Unit Paste Unit Rename Channel Add Remove Unit Close Site Channel Routing Site Properties Print Site Report Print Unit Report The Unit Properties window appears as shown below 58 Converge BBOTA Unit Properties Device ID 0 Meter T Channel f O Output Post Gain le Add A New Unit To add a unit to a Site right click in eit
213. iguration and management software Simplified programming Reduced installation times Best in class processing speed ClearOne s world class customer service technical support and field engineering services Common Features The leading edge features common to all products in the Converge Pro family include USB connector on front panel for easy connectivity with a laptop or PC Dual RJ 45 Ethernet ports Dual RJ 45 expansion bus ports TDM Time Division Multiplexed mix minus audio and control buses RS 232 serial port up to 115 200 bps Dual DB 25 control status GPIO General Purpose Input Output Ports Mini phoenix audio input output connectors color coded by channel type Differential inputs and outputs Feature Enhancements Converge Pro feature enhancements include ClearOne s next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation up to eight discrete digital signal processors DSPs improve full duplex performance and remove echo in the most difficult acoustic environments New PTT Push to Talk microphone compatibility provides greater design and configuration flexibility Advanced noise cancellation reduces background noise caused by fans HVAC systems and other relatively constant background noise sources Up to eight independent signal processing blocks each with 15 user configurable filters including all pass low pass high pass low shelving high shelving and parametric delay and compression
214. iminate ringing 3 Click Close to close the window once the Setup Complete indicator has switched from yellow in process to green setup complete Noise Gate This feature reduces buzz and hum from the amp when the system is on but not in use Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Fiter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EG Fiter Limiter Mutichannel Contrat Threshold 0 50 pores a prin lt 8 73 1 Enable Noise Gate Enables or Disables the feature Mode Adaptive Actively monitors the noise floor of the environment and determines when to enable gating Manual User sets Threshold Timer Time before the Amp begins gating NOTE The Noise Floor must be at the Threshold Level for the duration set in the Timer in order to enable the Noise Gate Filter None No filtering is applied to noise High Pass A High Pass filter is applied to noise before threshold reading Low Pass A Low Pass filter is applied to suppress noise before threshold reading High Low Pass High and Low Pass filtering is applied to noise before threshold reading Compressor Allows the user to enable compression on an amp channel based on configurable parameters With a few exceptions noted below this feature operates identically to the Processing Compressors Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Fiter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Li
215. in graph view and the bypass status is shown as on in table view Channel Property Configuration input 1 89 Add Filter Press the Add Filter button to create a filter for the input channel When you add a filter it appears in the Active Filter drop down list and on the active filter graph You can configure up to four active filters per input channel The number of remaining available filters for the channel is shown under Filters Remaining Remove Filter Press the Remove Filter button to remove the filter currently selected in the Active Filter drop down list Removing a filter increments the Filters Remaining by one Table View Press the Table View button to toggle the display between graph view and table view Table view displays filter settings in table format for all filters configured for the input channel Clicking on a row in table view selects the filter displays the current settings for that filter and allows you to edit the values in the setting fields Changes made in the setting fields are immediately reflected in the table Channel Property Configuration Input 1 ABC NC Faer AGCIALC ostro Active bares Bandwith sea sz z 5 a a mas aps Fu 1 0 Peo 223 16036006 on 200 299 ort 243 28 04 on For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic G
216. in the label entry box You can also change channel configuration settings For example for an output channel you can toggle the NOM button to turn constant gain mode on or off toggle the Mute button and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel NOTE Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console Creating Channel Objects One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring a fader channel using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save a fader channel configuration right click in the fader section of the screen surrounded by an orange rectangle From the menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Export as object Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes 138 Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object
217. inations provide basic functionality in Command String syntax e a alert b backspace M form feed new line e r carriage return e X horizontal tab v vertical tab backslash Creating Command Strings Type a command string in the Command 0 through Command 7 text boxes in the center pane of the Control Tab Alternatively you can copy an existing string from any source then right click in a Command entry box and select Paste from the shortcut menu that appears 157 Running Command Strings Console stores the commands strings created in the Control tab for subsequent execution via the STRING serial command You can execute the STRING command in macros using control pin programming in the Event Scheduler and from the Control Console page of the Web Builder tab Using macros also enables you to execute command strings from external control devices See the Control Tab topic for more information For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Controls and Connections Front Panel Control Status Port Gating Tab Macro Tab Event Scheduler Control Tab 158 EVENT SCHEDULER TAB The Event Scheduler allows you to schedule commands for execution at a specific time events Using the event scheduler you can schedule single events or recurring events that are executed at pre defined time intervals Accessing the Event Scheduler To schedule
218. input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end e 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units en microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command Converge Pro 840T The successor to the industry leading XAP 400 The 840T provides the same rich feature set as the 880T complete with a built in telephone interface and power amplifier for standalone conferencing applications For large venues the 840T also provides industry leading expansion capabilities via ClearOne s expansion bus technology Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel ClearEffect wideband emulation for speech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel Caller ID amp selectable ringers Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancell
219. iorty v v v Max Mics h j fa fs Last Mc Mode on ott j ou on Internal gating groups control mic inputs connected to a specific unit Configure Internal Gating Group settings as follows Enter a name in the Group Name field optional Select the First Mic Priority checkbox to enable this feature default or deselect it to turn First Mic Priority off NOTE ClearOne recommends using First Mic Priority to maintain maximum audio intelligibility by allowing only one mic to gate on to a participant s voice First Mic Priority allows more than one microphone to gate on at same time but it restricts more than one mic from gating on to the same audio source It does this by determining the audio level received by all mics when the first mic is gated on and then using this audio level as the ambient level for the gating group If First Mic Priority is disabled two or more microphones will usually gate on when only one person speaks Select the Max of Mics from the drop down list the default is 4 This sets the maximum number of microphones that can be gated on at any one time within a gating group The maximum number of mics is limited to the number of mics included in the gating group For internal gating groups the maximum number of mics is 8 for Converge Pro 880 880T 880TA 8i Converge SR 1212 and SR 1212A units and 4 for Converge Pro 840T units Select the Last Mic Mode from the drop down list the default is
220. ise over the line and initiate TEC readaptation NOTE Renulling the line sends a burst of white noise that will be audible on the far end of the telephone line For more information please see the Table of Contents for these related topics Connect To A Site Services Menu Overview Telco Rx Settings Telco Tx Settings Phonebook Telephone Echo Cancellation 194 PHONEBOOK The Phonebook allows you to store telephone numbers and make speed dial assignments for teleconferencing applications Accessing Phonebook To access the phone book select Phonebook from the Services menu press the Phonebook a button on the Console Button Bar or press the Phonebook button in the Dialer screen Using Phonebook To add an entry to the phonebook press the New Entry button enter a Name and Number and select a Speed Dial Number optional Name Speed Dial No _ Ce Removed phonebook entry _ NOTE The Number field allows numbers and only No other characters such as parentheses and dashes are allowed 195 Press the Add button to add the entry to the phonebook The number now appears in the phonebook list and in the Phonebook portion of the Dialer screen Phonebook Edit Wee speeqDalto Number 8005551212 fi z Esan Added phonebook entry To edit an entry select it and press the Change button To delete an entry select it and press the Rem
221. itiate an auto sweep System Checks enable you to test network connections telephone connections microphones and output channels for all units in a site Running system checks can help identity component failures within the system using the tests you select on the System Check Config tab described in the next section Debug Console System Check Report Une convergeesnTaco gt Resut Report Network Telephone Mc2 Mc3 Mic 4 Mc 5 Mc 6 Mic 7 The test LEDs indicate test results as follows Red Test fails Yellow Test not enabled in System Check Config Green Test passes 213 System Check Config Tab The System Check Config tab allows you to select and configure the diagnostic tests run on System Checks tab Debug Console Meter View Gate View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Config Sound Masting System Check Configuration Uni H0 ConvergessoTan Use in test Network Telephone Mc1 Mc2 F Mc3 Mc4 mcs mcs Temp PAFaut System Check Config settings include Unit System Check Configuration Specifies the unit in the site that you want to test Network Select this check box to test the IP configuration and network connectivity for the selected unit Telephone Select this check box to test Telco Rx and or Telco Tx functionality e Mic 1 4 840T Mic 1 8 880 880T 880TA 8i SR 1
222. just Off Attenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features 36x24 matrix 12analog in out 12 expansion bus in out 8 assignable processing blocks in out 4 assignable fader blocks in out Assignable Processing Blocks Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley Compressor Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration Input Gain Adjust Mic or Line Level Phantom Power on off Echo Cancellation on off Noise Cancellation on off Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off Chairman Override on off AGC on off Automatic Level Control on off 296 Auto Gate Manual gate Adaptive Ambient on off Pre AEC channel Mic Line Inputs 1 8 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO e Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to 0 dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment Maximum Level 65 dBu to 4 20 dBu Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Expansion Bus In Out Proprietary Network RJ 45 2 1
223. l to query text GAIN Gain Adjustment This command changes or reports back the gain for a channel Command Form DEVICE GAIN Channel Group Value Absol Rel Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 3 5 7 12 16 17 I J O M P L F T R Value Signed 2 99 90 99 90 dB Float Null to query in text Absol Rel 0 A Absolute R Relative Null Relative NOTE Values indicate valid range for entry values only Actual internal range of the gain stage is from 65 to 20 Absolute values will be limited to the internal gain range 243 GATE Gate Status This command reports the gate status of Mics This command is read only Command Form DEVICE GATE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Hexadecimal 4 Bits 0 7 represent gate status on Mics 1 8 Null sent in text Value returned GHOLD Gate Hold Time Adjust This command selects reports the setting of hold time Command Form DEVICE GHOLD Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Float 2 0 10 8 00 S Null to query in text GMODE Gating Mode This command selects reports the setting of gating mode Command Form DEVICE GMODE Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 1
224. lades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Apparatet skal tilkoples jordet stikkontakt 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 12 Use only with the cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped 15 Use the mains plug to disconnect the apparatus from the AC mains The mains plug shall remain readily operable 16 On Off switch located on the front panel of the Converge Pro 880TA and SR 1212A does NOT disconnect power from the AC mains 17 To completely
225. levant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses By default all microphones are routed to the O bus Process A D 840T and Process A H 880 880T 880TA 8i SR 1212 SR 1212A Routing There are four processing channels on the Converge Pro 8407 eight on the 880 8807 880TA 8i and eight on the Converge SR 1212 and SR 1212A Processing channels enable you to apply filters compression delay and other processing settings to an input or a group of inputs which can then be routed to a single output or group of outputs Cross Point Shortcut Menu In addition to setting levels the Cross Point Shortcut Menu shown below enables you to copy and paste the configuration of the current cross point to other cross points To access the shortcut menu right click anywhere in the Center Pane of the Matrix screen Cross Point Enter Copy Cell Ctrl C Paste Cell Ctrl V Copy Matrix Ctrl G Paste Matrix Ctrl P Clear Matrix Export as object Cross Point Level Control To adjust the level for a cross point right click on the cross point and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider 142 The level you select now appe
226. lications and room types For example you can create a baseline site file for divided rooms that specifies mic gating output crosspoints AEC and AGC ALC store it on your hard drive and use the file for other similar installations This approach allows you to standardize settings across venues NOTE All units ship with a default site configuration file Site files also enable you to create users set passwords set unit master slave control status set up email notification and configure time local parameters as described in the Site Properties topic Accessing Site Files To open a Site file select the File menu in Console mepBeuMzv ts157 c s ClearOne Matris AbCHeference Macro Gating Cobo Soro Evert Scheuer Current Unit 20 Converged toT at Ste View Tres View FS OU o B Sw red 2 red 3 ine rous leno he ame Output Opa 2 3 Oupat 4 Output 5 Output 6 49 The File menu appears Select Open Site as shown below View Add Connec New Site Site Properties Print gt 1 Board Room cvg 2 Sitel cvg 3 Sitel cvg Exit The Open dialog appears as shown below Open ottype Converge Steefcvgl z Locate the site file you want to open and click Open Console opens the site file and it appears in the Site Selection drop down list in the Site Pane as shown below U
227. ll to query text COUNTRY Country Selection This command sets reports the country for telco compliance purposes Command Form DEVICE COUNTRY Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 US Canada 2 Europe 3 Mexico 4 Australia 5 South Africa 6 Japan 7 Brazil 8 South Korea 9 China 10 Singapore 11 Taiwan 12 New Zealand 13 India 14 Hong Kong 15 Malaysia 16 Argentina Null to query in text CTRLMASTER Control Master Mode This command reports the mode of the unit for SNMP control Command Form DEVICE CTRLMASTER Value Argument Type Size Values Units 234 Value Unsigned Integer 4 1 Master 2 Slave Null to query in text DECAY Decay Adjust This command selects reports the setting of the decay rate Command Form DEVICE DECAY Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 1 Slow 2 Medium 3 Fast Null to query in text DEFAULT Default The Unit Sets the unit to factory defaults There is no query for this command Command Form DEVICE DEFAULT No Arguments DELAY Delay Adjust This command selects reports the setting of delay time Command Form DEVICE DELAY Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 5 P Value Unsigned Float 2 0 00 250 00 Ms Null to query in text
228. lues System Hexadecimal 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Check Integer Network Telephone Mic 1 Mic 2 Mic 3 Mic 4 Mic 5 Mic 6 Mic 7 Mic 8 ower Amp Temp Check Power Amp Fault Check SIP Proxy Registration Status Packet Loss Statistics All other bits reserved SYSRESULT System Check Result This command reports the results of the system check This command is reportable only It cannot be queried or set The System Check integer bits determine which test result will be reported Each test results in a separate SYSRESULT message Argument Type Size Values System Hexadecimal 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Check Integer B Network Telephone Mic 1 Mic 2 Mic 3 Mic 4 Mic 5 Mic 6 Mic 7 Mic 8 ower Amp Temp Check Power Amp Fault Check SIP Proxy Registration Status Packet Loss Statistics All other bits reserved Status Unsigned 2 0 Fail Integer 1 Pass 2 NULL lt Not Tested or Test Disabled in SYSCONFIG gt 270 Argument Type Size Values Message String 40 For the telephone on hook the message will report the line voltage the line current other results and if dial tone is detected For the telephone off hook the message will report the line current other results and if dial tone is detected The bit mask for the other results is XXXX XXXX gt set if switched from CTR21 to FCC because of low current gt set if used DIAL bit while dialing
229. lues Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Float 2 100 00 to 0 00 dB Null to query in text PAPOL Polarity Switch This command changes audio signal polarity on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PAPOL lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Normal 1 Reverse 2 Toggle Null to query in text PARST PA Reset This command resets the power supplies on an individual power amplifier circuits There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE PARST Channel lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Reserved Zero 2 Zero PASME PA Sound Mask Enable This command enables the sound mask signal on a PA Channel Command Form DEVICE PASME Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Voice Mode 1 Wideband Mode Null to query in text PASML PA Sound Mask Level This command selects reports the sound mask level on a PA channel Command Form DEVICE PASML Channel Group Amplitude Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Amplitude Signed Short 2 60 00 20 00 dB Null to query in text 260
230. mance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end e 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response e AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units en microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command Converge Pro TH20 The successor to the industry leading XAP TH2 the TH20 enables conference call functionality for Converge Pro installations through the addition of a telephone interface The TH20 expansion bus allows you to link up to 16 TH20 units together for industry leading conferencing capability It also adds two line level inputs and outputs for increased system capacity Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel ClearEffect wideband emulation for speech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel
231. mand sets or reports the device event log mask Command Form DEVICE LOGMASK Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Hexadecimal 4 XXXX gt Reset gt Errors gt Password Access gt Telco On Off gt Dial gt Call Duration gt System Checks gt Firmware Download gt Reserved gt Default Reserved gt Reserved gt Safety Mute gt Macro Execution gt Preset Execution Audio Clipping gt Microphone Gains gt Processor Gains gt Fader Gains gt Telco Gains gt Power Amp Gains gt Power Amp Errors gt Caller ID gt SIP Message Log mM gt Reserved Null to query in text V V LVL Level This command reports the level of a channel This command is read only Command Form DEVICE LVL lt Channel gt Group Position Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 8 5 7 12 16 17 20 I J OD MBL ETR Position Meter Type 2 See Meter Type Definitions Value Signed Float 4 99 99 99 99 dB Sent with Null in text Value returned 248 LVLREPORT Level Report This command selects reports the status of level reporting for the specified channel Command Form DEVICE LVLREPORT Channel Group Position Value A
232. miter Mutichannel Control Enable Compressor Group Group 4 C Group 3 C Group 2 C Group 1 None Post Cmprs Gain Delay Mode Enabling Delay Mode sets a timed delay after which the Compressor activates Timing 74 ranges from 0 to 20ms Note Groups do not interact with Processor channels Mute Mutes the specific Power Amp channel e Polarity Reverses the amplifier s output polarity EQ Filter Adjusts specific frequency bands within a 12db range Enable EQ Filter Enables or disables the EQ Limiter Establishes a ceiling level for the amplifier output Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Enable Limiter Limits the output to the Threshold Max Level specified by the user Enable Soft Clipper Softens the clipping effect at Threshold Max level to prevent damage to external equipment Note Both settings can be active simultaneously 75 Multichannel Control Multichannel Control is only available on amplifier channels Each of the 4 amplifiers can be assigned to one of two Multichannel groups When amplifier channels are assigned to a Multichannel group Mute and Gain for the group are controlled from a single point NOTE Mutiple PA Channel Selections cannot be applied to both groups simultaneously If you assign PA 1 and 3 to Multichannel Group1 those amplifiers cannot be assigned to Multichannel Group 2 without removing them from the first group Channel Property
233. mpression and Mute on and off by clicking the associated LED Buttons To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the channel 67 Fader Channel Settings NOTE The Converge Pro 880TA and Converge SR 1212 do not have fader settings MIC Line Pres _ Gain AEC NC Gate 1 NOM Mute Gain Pres Dutput p x 9 Q Q 0098 Ser output 1 pat me Output 3 d Output 4 DoT Output 5 vec Output 6 ne pu e LT Output 7 9 9 mme Outputs Q C1000 7 em speaker Telco RX Pres Gain Mute NC 1 1 NOM Mut Gain Pres Telco TX Telco RX COBY Q 0 Expansion Audio RX 0 0 Expansion Audio TX ETOC A Us MATRIX To Exp From Exp P To Exp P From Exp Q R R To Exp Q From Exp R To Exp R From Exp T T To Exp S From Exp T U 0 To Exp T Lr From Exp U oe nr v To Exp U L From W Exp From Exp Weer X To Exp W From Exp X SSF Y ma E fom ee z Ea Fom Exp ely o Exp Processing RX A Del Comp Mute Gain Pres Processing TX Process A 9 9 CUB w Process a TTEENEHLOL r3 Proces bh Fader RX ojojo r Converge 401 EE 3 EUM ot LLL LLL LL Lu uu O8 Pointing to a fader channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel i
234. n Argument Description Sets the Mute for an Input Output Processor ChanneliGroup Faders Inputs L Line inputs M Telco Rx or Telco Tx Microphone Inputs Outputs P Processing R Rx T Telco Tx Mute mode 0 Off 1 Ory 2 Toggle T Do Command Mode 155 4 In the Command Editor section of the screen select the device Type DID and Command from the drop down lists When you select a command its description appears in the Command Description box The parameters associated with the command appear next to the Command drop down list and the valid values or range for each parameter appear in the Argument Description box Control Pin State Active Low Command MUTE TR 1 active High Commend B MUTE 1RO 5 Set parameter values for the command as required then press the Apply button The command appears in the selected Active Inactive Command text box 6 To complete programming for the selected pin repeat steps 3 through 6 to set the Active Command for the opposite pin state 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 to program additional pins Clearing Pin Programming To clear programming for a pin select the Control Port and Selected Pin using the drop down lists select the pin state using the Active Command buttons then press the Clear button To clear all pins right click and select Clear All from the shortcut menu Exporting Control Objects You can save control port objects into the Conver
235. n change the channel Label name of the output channel in the label entry field toggle NOM constant gain on or off toggle Mute on or off and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time as you make configuration changes NOTE Changes to configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console Creating Channel Objects One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks 106 To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Export as object Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name
236. n the number of open mics When using NOM over the expansion bus only R Buses support passing NOM information The default is On Mute Button tte ai Clicking the Mute button toggles muting for the telco receive channel The default is Off Gain Slider 113 The Gain slider changes the gain for the telco receive channel from nominal 0 To change the value use the slider or the selector box Range is from 65 to 20dB in 5dB increments The default is Min Max Limits Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain Scale in the Gain section of the screen to set minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can exceed the min and max limits Min Max limits apply to all serially connected control devices and prevent users from adjusting levels beyond the specified levels Post Gain Meter m Post Gain m The Post Gain level meter displays the post gain signal level in dB Channel Routing Matrix The channel routing matrix section of the Channel screen shows the associated matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel telco rx in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a green box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box Telco RX endo o p pdpo
237. n the services offered by your telephone company You can set the duration of the hook flash using the slider or the selector box Range is 50ms to 2 seconds in 10ms steps The default is 250ms DTMF Level This feature allows you to adjust the DTMF tone level in relationship to the participant audio level in the room The level can be adjusted in 1dB steps from a nominal level of to plus or minus 12dB 1dB increments The default is Audible Ring Indication When this feature is enabled an audible ring is heard for incoming calls The level adjustment allows you to customize the level in relationship to the participant audio level in the room The level can be adjusted in 1dB steps from a nominal level O default to plus or minus 12dB in 1dB increments The default is OdB Audible Hook Indication When the unit goes off hook connects a beep is injected into the receive channel and transmit channel of the unit When the unit goes on hook disconnects a series of two beeps is injected into the receive channel to indicate that the call has been dropped This indicator can be turned on or off using the Audible Hook Indication check box The default is On The level adjustment allows you to customize the level in relationship to the participant audio level in the room The level can be adjusted using the slider or selector box from nominal level 0 to plus or minus 12 in 1dB steps The default is Ringer Cadence Sta
238. n white shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane shown below Site View Tree View ij fre fr Fader 1 Set the desired gain settings for the fader channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle mute on and off by clicking the associated Mute LED Button To access the full set of configuration settings for the channel click on the Magnifying Glass icon located next to the channel 68 Expansion Audio RX and TX input Q o B PowerAm Telco RX Pres Gon 1 1 NOM Gein Pres Telco TX Q e recor Exp O From Exp PA LE To Exp P From Exp 4 To Exp Q 0 a a From Exp amp 5 ToExp 8 From Exp T T T From Exp U v Ugo From Exp V CO v w pM IO x x 3 Y Y z X t t J ea o K i 1 Bee SS Pointing to an Expansion RX or Expansion TX channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange Clicking the channel selects it and shows the Input TX channels only Output RX channels only Processing Expansion and Fader channel routing white highlights for the selected channel as shown above Power Amp Channels Converge Pro 8
239. n window with the AEC tab selected as shown below Channel Property Configuration Input 1 AEC NC Fiter AGCIALC Gating 7 Enable Acoustic Echo Canceller AEC Enable Push to Tak Mode Non linear Processing NLP Pre Gain PTT Threshold C Aggressive 0 Adapt and AEC Reference c c Ebus Ret 1 G Son on Echo Return Loss Enhancement ERLE 20 EIS For more information on each configuration feature see the following topics AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation Mic Gating Filters 99 Channel Routing Matrix Inputs The channel routing matrix section of the Channel screen shows the matrix row and audio routing configuration for the selected input channel mic input 1 in this case Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The dB level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box E EA Landing edo e o a o imdno gmdno o duanag a o gt x oal o do d el b dol weg ol gt g gol o 17 301 990 A del M dx oL S x dor Accor z gel n 17 0 pcg oy lt 901 Tg 01 Wd oL N e Y g ssaand To adjust cross poi
240. nd navigate through the License Agreement and Information screens that appear 11 At the Select Installation Folder window choose the directory where you want to install Console Press the Disk Cost button to analyze available and required free space if needed NOTE ClearOne recommends that you use the default directory when installing Console 12 Press the Next button until installation starts 13 A Windows unsigned driver warning dialog appears as shown below Click Continue Anyway Windows XP or Install this driver software anyway Windows Vista to proceed copy Converge Converge Pro USB drivers onto your system 41 Software Installation A The software you are installing has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me wh this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the software vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation NOTE If you click STOP Installation Windows XP or Don t install this driver software Windows Vista Windows will terminate USB device driver installation Console installation will continue to completion and Console will function properly over IR However you will not be able to use Console over USB 1
241. ndard Uses the cadence specified in the Country Code to detect the standard ring cadence per country 110 Custom Set for distinctive ring cadences When custom is set the Min On and Min Off times must be selected from their respective drop down boxes PBX s can have distinctive ring cadences that are not country specific These times are the minimum values the ring cadence must be for the unit to detect the ring If the ring cadence signal provided by the PBX is greater than the custom settings the unit will detect the ring Telco Meters Tab The Telco Meters tab displays a round trip signal flow diagram for the selected telco rx as well as real time level meters for the signal at each stage of processing The settings on this tab cannot be modified Channel Property Configuration Telco RX x NC Telco Meters TEAL TEALE Temi Teles Cobo TR t t Trance roy Trangrnd Opt had 20 Riecv Oups NOTE When you click the Close button bottom right corner of screen or close the window manually any changes you make in the tabs of the Channel Property Configuration Telco RX screen are automatically saved The telco meters include Telephone Echo Return Loss TERL This meter shows the amount of echo loss from the telephone line to the unit Telephone Echo Return Loss Enhancement TERLE This meter shows the enhancement added by the telephone hybrid to r
242. ndex gt Speed Number Label Argument Type Size Values Units Index Unsigned Integer 2 0 19 Must be less than the Number of Phone Book Entries Speed Dial Unsigned Integer 2 for not assigned to a speed dial 1 20 NULL to query in text Number String 44 1 44 chars 0 9 Label String 16 1 16 chars PP Phantom Power This command selects reports the setting of phantom power Command Form DEVICE PP Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Toggle Null to query text PRESET Preset Execution Reporting This command selects reports the state of a preset Command Form DEVICE PRESET Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 0 Binary Null Text Query Last Preset Ran See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 13 5 Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Set preset state to off 1 Set state to on and execute if not already on 2 Execute and return state to off Null to query current state in text 262 PRGSTRING Program String This command sets reports a programmed string COMMAND FORM DEVICE PRGSTRING lt 10 gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units ID Unsigned Integer 4 0 7 Value String 80 CLEAR Clear current value 1 80 Chars Null to query in text Special Characters Va alert b backspace f form feed n newline r c
243. nel Mode amp PIN Front Panel Lock Unlock Select Lock in the Front Panel Mode field to lock the front panel LCD of the unit and require a PIN code to unlock it Enter the unlock code in the Front Panel Pin field Select Unlock in the Front Panel Mode field to leave the front panel LCD unlocked Telephone Country Code Select the appropriate Telephone Country Code for your installation B80TA 880T 840T TH20 models only 61 Unit Properties Comm Communications Tab The Comm tab contains IP protocol selection and address settings as well as serial port configuration settings as shown below Converge 880TA Unit Properties Device ID O IP Settings If you want to use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol select the DHCP checkbox Selecting DHCP disables the remaining IP settings Otherwise enter the IP Address Subnet and Gateway information and DNS Domain Name Server addresses for your installation The default is Use DHCP IP Filters Use IP Filters to enter specific IP addresses that will be allowed to connect to the selected unit You can specify a range of IP addresses by using zeros For example entering 192 168 105 0 will allow any IP addresses in the 192 168 105 1 to 192 168 105 254 range to access the unit Serial Port Settings Select the Serial Port settings Baud Rate and Flow Control that are appropriate for your installation Serial Echo enables and disables echo on the serial port The default for Baud Rate
244. nels are internal sub bus channels similar to Processing channels that provide additional sub bus mixes to control volume settings within a site Accessing Fader Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired fader channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane View Add Corned Modes Services Heb Boo TTo CG 3 CE ClearOne As shown above the Center Pane displays the configuration controls and gating for the selected Fader channel Fader configuration controls are described in the following sections Channel Label Fader 1 Fader 1 Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced Mute Button Eni Clicking the Mute button toggles muting The default is Off 136 Gain Slider amp Post Gain Meter Post 30 5 20 Coo 65 20 TERR n gene nme ng Gain ___ ___ BER i Adjusts output gain level Use the Gain slider to adjust output volume level You can also enter the level directly in the selector box The Post Gain meter reflects the post gain level of the signal in dB Min Max Limits Use the yellow and green upper and lower limit arrows on the Gain scale to create minimum and maximum gain level limits These limits only apply when using relative gain commands absolute gain commands can
245. nfig Sound Mask Meter T Meter T Meter T M put Pre Gain Input Pre Gain Input Pre Gain 1 1 Mc 1 Gate Mc 1 Gate 8 Mc 2Gste a Mic 2Gate Mc 3 Gate Mc 3 Gate B Mc 4 Gate Mic 4 Gate 8 Mc 5 Gate Mic 5 Gate 8 Mc6Gate Me GGe Mic 7 Gate Mc7 Gate em Jub Meter 6 Meter 7 Unt Unt I0 ConwergeSRA C8 v ComvergeSRA CB v Meter T Meter Input Pre Gain hd M Input Pre Gan bd 4 1 Mci Gate B Mc2Gate A Mc 3Gate 9 Mc 4 Gate Mc 5 Gate Mc 6 Gate Mc 7 Gate EI Meter 1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Unt Unt Unt 0 ConvergeSRA CB 00 ConvergeSRA CB 0 ComwergeSRA CB v To configure a meter select the Unit Meter and Channel using the drop down lists Meter view provides a useful diagnostic tool for system wide troubleshooting and configuration Gate View Tab The Gate View tab shows real time gating status allowing you to monitor gating activity for the mics and gating groups for the currently connected unit Debug Console Signal Generator System Checks System Check Config Sound Masking The gate indicator for each input is dark green in the gate off condition and light green if the input is gated on 211 Signal Generator The Signal Generator tab enables you to generate test signals to audibly test signal paths gain settings routing and channel configuration settings The signal generator can also be used for noise
246. ng NOTE All meters in Console are peak level meters NC Button in Clicking the Noise Cancellation button opens the Channel Property Configuration Telco RX window with the NC tab selected allowing you to configure noise cancellation settings To use noise cancellation click Enable Noise Canceller then adjust the Cancellation Depth to the setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity for your installation The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from to 15dB The default is The noise canceller default is Off Clear Effect Button To reduce bandwidth requirements telephone lines limit audio bandwidth to a range of 300Hz 3 3kHz ClearEffect enhances the incoming signal from a telephone line to emulate wideband audio by adding high and low frequencies to the audio signal Click the ClearEffect button to toggle this feature on and off The default is On ALC Button Clicking the Automatic Level Control button toggles ALC on and off ALC provides auto leveling for all conference call participants on the telco rx line keeping soft and loud participants at a consistent level The default is Off See AGC ALC for additional information NOM Button NOM Maintains a constant output level by automatically adjusting gain levels based on the number of mics gated on and routed to the selected output channel NOM reduces the output level proportionally by 3dB for every doubling i
247. ng between source devices and destination devices on the E bus network The E bus contains 18 independent digital audio buses labeled I Z which can route mic or line inputs in any combination across the E bus network The E bus also contains eight PA adapt acoustic echo cancellation reference buses six global gating buses and one control bus S Z Buses These eight buses are line input mixer buses They are used to route auxiliary audio such as from a CD player or VCR to and from other units on the network These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required I R Buses These ten audio buses are generally used for routing microphone audio between Converge Converge Pro devices Information about the number of gated microphones NOMcount and other relevant information for the microphone mixers are tracked for microphones routed to these buses By default all microphones are routed to the O bus PA Adapt Acoustic Echo Cancellation Reference Buses These buses allow an input from a Converge Converge Pro device to reference an output on another linked device for AEC and PA Adaption See AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference and AEC for more information Global Gating Groups A F These buses are microphone gating groups that support first mic priority maximum number of mics etc and work across all linked Converge Converge Pro devices Unlike the audio buses they contain only mic status and gate parameters See the Gating and G
248. ng cadence to either standard mode or custom mode The cadence can be set using the RINGON and RINGOFF commands The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command Command Form DEVICE RINGMOD lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R 265 Value Unsigned Short 2 0 Standard 1 Custom Null to query in text RINGOFF Ring Cadence Off Time This command sets the ring cadence off time The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command Command Form DEVICE RINGOFF lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Short 2 0 80 ms 1 128 2 256 3 384 4 512 5 640 6 768 7 896 8 1024 Null to query in text RINGON Ring Cadence On Time This command sets the ring cadence on time The country code should be set first using the COUNTRY command Command Form DEVICE RINGON Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Unsigned Short 2 0 100 ms 1 150 2 200 3 256 4 384 5 512 6 640 7 1024 Null to query in text RXBOOST Receive Boost This command selects reports the receive boost status Command Form DEVICE RXBOOST Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units C
249. ng parameters which can be applied to microphones connected to the local device or to microphones connected to other units on the Expansion Bus Global Gating Groups A D Gating groups provide greater flexibility and control of mics See also Global Gating Bus and Expansion Bus Global Gating Bus Part of the Expansion Bus these ten mix minus buses I R pass mic status and gate parameter information such as First Mic Priority and NOM Number of Open Mics See also First Mic Priority and NOM GPIO General Purpose Input Output GPIO enables external devices to access the Converge Pro serial command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and preset changes via the Control Status A and B ports All Converge Pro devices connected via the Expansion Bus can be controlled from a single Control Status port on any of the devices Hold Time The length of time that a microphone remains on after the voice input level drops below the gate ratio This can be used to prevent the microphone from gating off during brief pauses in speech HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Part of the Internet protocol suite HTTP is used to transmit information such as HTML pages between servers and clients on IP networks Last Mic Mode Sets the last activated mic to Last On Mic 1 8 or Off The Last On setting leaves the last activated mic gated on until another mic input gates on Macro A series of commands stored and executed to
250. ng this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the companies inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by ClearOne Communications Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas 304 EUROPEAN COMPLIANCE Conformity of the equipment with the guidelines below is attested by the C EC Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer s Name ClearOne Communications Manufacturer s Address Edgewater Corporate Park South Tower 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 Salt Lake City Utah 84116 U S A Model Converge Pro 880 880T 8l 840T TH20 amp SR
251. nit Data Defaut Not Connected The Console window consists of the components described in the following sections 44 Menu Bar Fle View Add Conmect Modes Services Help Menus available on the Menu Bar include File View Add Connect Modes Services Help Opens the context sensitive help system provides software and firmware version information Button Bar FT Ce 33 SEOBSUBES 9 pe ClearOne Controls on the Button Bar include Create Site Open Site Save Site Connect Disconnect Configuration Mode Preset Mode Execute Preset Run Macro Dialer Phonebook Label Editor Device Log Event Log Debug Console Web Builder Firmware Loader Safety Mute Toggles Safety Mute on and off Safety Mute holds all outputs in a muted state Signal Generator LED Flashes green when the signal generator for any unit in the site is turned on v E Ei Nd t bBsssssgeoussg ii Help Opens the context sensitive help system provides software and firmware version information 45 Tab Bar ura AEC Reference Gating Cora Sting Event Dusk Tabs available on the Tab Bar include Unit Channel Matrix e AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference for SR 1212 SR 1212A Macro Gating Control String Event Scheduler Database Clicking a tab displays the screen for that tab in the Console Center Pane Site Pane Site Selection Site Selecti
252. nnel 66 Processing Channel Settings MiCfLine ma a ma TD 9 0048 NOM Mute Oan Pres 2 9 00485 H 1 9 2 9 9 Ouse e 9 004835 4 NOM Mute Gan Pres 9 Q C 6048 n F4 U O o From Exp P tie From Ep R _ A From Exp i 5 D From Exp T T AO From Exe y From Exp V v Y Mo OUEST From Ep W w E From Exp X x x To Ep X From Exp Y Y T D z ILLU From Exp I n To Em From Exp J J 777777 B Ftom Exp K ToEp ns X ow To Ep L From Exp M To Exp HON EUN e S To Exp N Converge c bet bel i pun mobs i Pointing to a processing channel in the Matrix section of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel in white shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the Site Pane shown below Site View Tree View ILT ILR Set the desired Gain settings for the processing channel using the Gain Arrows to the right of the Gain Display Toggle Del Delay Comp Co
253. nnel routing matrix of the Channel pane for a Mic Input channel is shown below 78 Use the routing legend to determine the current cross point configuration of the selected input channel As shown in the example above Input 1 is non gated and cross pointed by default to Output 1 It is also gated and cross pointed by default to Outputs 5 7 Telco TX and Exp Bus O Clicking a cross point box selects it clicking it a second time sets the cross point as indicated by a colored box The level for set cross points is shown numerically in the box To adjust cross point gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu as shown below r Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears as shown below Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is 1 TET H oh Is N 5 0 NOTE Changes are automatically saved when you close the slider HHEBEHBHBDEBR OUIOBUEUOEU EBHBSEBBHBERUBERI In the channel routing matrix section of the Channel pane pressing the channel button underneath an Output Process or Fader cross point box shown above displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel shown below 20 65 gt o a le 79 This
254. non compliant Equipment Placement Converge Pro devices are designed for installation in a standard 19 inch equipment rack Environmental Converge Pro devices are designed to operate at ambient unit temperatures between 14 F 10 C and 122 F 50 C SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The Converge Pro Console software minimum system requirements are Supported Operating Systems Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Vista Minimum System Requirements e Processor 300 MHz Pentium IIl or AMD equivalent RAM 256 Megabytes RAM Video 1024x768 SVGA 16 bit Hard Drive 40 Megabytes Network 10 100 Mbps Ethernet USB Port Version 1 0 CD Drive CD DVD ROM Minimum Software Requirements Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4 0 or higher Adobe Flash Version 9 0 or higher Java Sun Microsystems Java Runtime Environment version 6 0 or higher 14 UNPACKING Use the illustrations below to verify that you received all components for your Converge Pro product ClearOne is not responsible for product damage incurred during shipment Inspect your shipment carefully for obvious signs of damage If the shipment appears damaged retain the original boxes and packing material for inspection by the carrier and contact them immediately Converge Pro 880 Pack yntents 1 Converge Pro 880 P N 910 151 880 1 Terminal Block Connector 12 Position Green P N 673 017 212 1 Screw Washer Kit P N 680 0
255. ns Accessing AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference To access AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference select the unit that you want to define references for in the Tree View Tab of the Site Pane then select the AEC Reference PA Adapt Reference Tab from the Tab Bar in Console Help 33 SO8888G9 mmm ClearOne Una OD EL Control Sing Event Scheduler Database ER H0 Ho CONVERGEBSOTA 0 ER m ER Ste View Tree View pmonaotutu input 1 input 2 input 3 input 4 input S Input 6 input 7 input Input 10 input 11 input 12 Telco RX From Exp 0 From Exp P From Exp 0 From Exp R From Exp S From Exp T From Exp U From Exp V From Exp W From Exp X From Exp Y i T T IS TeTaToTsDeT felis From Exp 1 From Exp J From Exp From Exp L From Exp M ust ode Configuraton 51 Data Defaut UnitData Defaut M NotConmected LastMaco 0 LastPreset O 54 Stel Unit CONVERGEBSOTA 0 Device ID The AEC PA Adapt Reference screen appears in the center pane of Console AEC PA Adapt reference configuration is explained in the following sections AEC PA Adapt References Sources AEC References PA Adapt Reference Input 1 Input 1 Eus Ref 1 Output 12 7 Input 2 Input 2 output 1 output 12 gt Input 3 Input 3 Virtual Ref 1 M output 12 v Input 4 Input 4 Speaker d output 12 v 144 Use the dro
256. ns where they consistently deliver industry leading audio quality and unsurpassed reliability ClearOne s proprietary Distributed Echo Cancellation DEC technology forms the foundation of the Converge Pro product family and provides optimal audio quality for today s distributed conferencing environments In addition to DEC other ClearOne innovations including noise cancellation automatic gain and level control advanced microphone gating adaptive ambient and ClearEffect wideband audio emulation produce crystal clear audio that is equivalent to conference participants being in the same room Applications The Converge Pro product family provides scalable conferencing solutions for any size venue Some common applications include Boardrooms raining rooms Courtrooms Multimedia rooms Distance learning Auditoriums Houses of worship Sound reinforcement Large meeting venues Models The Converge Pro product family includes the following models Converge Pro 880 Converge Pro 880T Converge Pro 880TA Converge Pro 840T Converge Pro TH20 Converge Pro 8i Converge Pro SR1212 Converge Pro SR1212A Common Benefits Each product in the Converge Pro product family offers the following benefits Superior audio quality ClearOne s next generation signal processing algorithms Field proven conferencing technology Flexible configuration and expandability Improved conf
257. nt gain attenuation right click on a cross point box and select Cross Point from the shortcut menu El wm Cross Point Enter Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl The Cross Point Attenuation slider appears Move the slider or use the selector box to set the gain attenuation level in dB The range is from 60 to 12dB in 5dB increments The default is OdB Note that the level to the nearest is displayed in the cross point for the channel on the Matrix NOTE Your changes are automatically saved when you close the slider Expanded Channel Routing Matrix In the channel routing matrix pressing the button underneath an Output Process or Fader cross point box displays the signal flow diagram and configuration controls for that channel For example clicking on Output 5 displays the routing configuration for output channel 5 as shown below 100 Input E EXE ell ef edo e ob ed TES TS TS STIS TS Te T T TH as amp 8 RRRRRRRRIIIILISSPSSESSIPPSSSSPPPDI I ZB222 ovSHS Bone aesexxn CKnrzgzro mo R Gain Output Level ut 6 VE 20 gue EE 3 NOM Mute 5 285 ET This display is identical to that shown in Channel when the output channel is selected in the Tree View pane See Output Settings for more information You can change the channel Label name of the output channel in the label entry field t
258. ntrol Input Mute Output 10 Toggle 8 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 10 9 Y Control Input Mute Output 11 Toggle 10 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 11 11 Y Control Input Mute Output 12 Toggle 12 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 12 15 Vf Control Input Toggle Telco On Off 14 Y Status Output Telco Toggle Status On Off 15 M Control Input 16 Y Status Output 17 Status Output Microphone 1 Gate Status 18 N Status Output Microphone 2 Gate Status 19 N Status Output Microphone 3 Gate Status 20 N Status Output Microphone 4 Gate Status 21 N Status Output Microphone 5 Gate Status 22 N Status Output Microphone 6 Gate Status 28 N Status Output Microphone 7 Gate Status 24 N Status Output Microphone 8 Gate Status 25 NA NA Ground 281 Converge Pro 840T Port A Female DB 25 User Definable Control Status Default Description Control Input 1 Y 2 Y Status Output 3 M Control Input Mute All Mics Toggle 4 Y Status Output Status of Mute Mics 5 Y Control Input Telco On Off Toggle 6 Y Status Output Status of Telco On Off 7 Y Control Input Auto Answer Toggle 8 Y Status Output Status of Auto Answer 9 Y Control Input Mute Output 5 Toggle 10 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 5 11 Y Control Input Mute Input 5 Toggle 12 Y Status Output Status of Mute Input 5 18 Y Control Input Volume Up Output 8 1 dB 14 Y Status Output 15 Y Control Input
259. nu appears as shown below 26 Channels menu options i e channel types include Mics Inputs Outputs Process Faders Telco Tx Telco Rx Pwr Amp After you select an option a list of all available channels of that type is displayed Use the Menu Dial to select the channel you want to configure and press the Select button The Channels display appears Channel Display The channel display is identical for every channel type with the exception of the channel ID and channel label which both vary depending on the channel selected As shown below the display includes a peak level meter a peak dB reading a gain level adjustment box and a mute selector eo Setting Channel Gain and Mute The procedure for setting gain and mute is the same for all channel types 1 Use the Menu Dial to highlight Gain or Mute 36 Press the Select button Select the desired value using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to set the selected value Press the Esc button to return to the Channels menu PON NOTE When mute is set to on for a mic input channel the Microphone On LED for that channel illuminates red on the front panel For more information see the Table of Contents for these related topics LCD Programming Overview LCD Channels Menu LCD Settings Menu LCD Macros Menu LCD Presets Menu Controls and Connections Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Output Settings Process Settin
260. nverge Pro unit s Turn off all processing functions including AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation and Filters Optimize all mic and line inputs that are routed to an output before optimizing the output When optimizing output channels the objective is to match the output to the nominal gain of the input of the device that is connected to the output channel In general turn NOM off when an output channel feeds an amplifier Turn NOM on when optimizing telco tx channels in sound reinforcement applications and when optimizing for video codec configurations After optimizing gain using the procedures below re enable processing functions and NOM as required Optimizing Gain for Mic Input Channels 1 Open the Channel Tab and select the Mic Input on the Tree View Tab that you want to optimize as shown below Site Selection Current Unit Converget fOT A00 Mode Configuration Se Data Delak Unt Data Defaut Not Connected MMMM MMM Ste Unt ConvergeeeoTADO Device 1D 0 2 Have somebody repeat a test count at a normal distance from the microphone generally this would be seated at the conference table or positioned for a video teleconference 3 Adjust the Coarse Gain Slider until the peaks on the Post Gain Meter are close to 6 just hitting yellow and the average level is close to 4 Adjust the Fine Gain Slider until the peaks on the Post Gain M
261. o Execution Reporting 247 MANUFACTURER Manufacturer Identification 247 MAX Maximum Gain Setting 0 0 ess tetas 248 MC Multi Channel Mode isssssssssssss sess ees 248 MINMAX Minimum and Maximum Gain 250 MIN Minimum Gain Setting ee 250 MLINE Mic Line Coarse Gain 250 MMAX Maximum Number of Microphones 250 MODEL Model Identification Label e 251 MTRXCLEAR Clear Matrix ess 251 MTRXLVL Matrix Attenuation Adjust 252 MTRX Matix ROUNO 3 noz enki berod ebbe e bowen NV vane edge ager eg ale d 251 MUTE Mule br dre kE REPRE AER Eo bh ebbe d eade needs 252 NAME Unit Name NETBIOS 252 NCD Noise Cancellation Depth en 252 NCSEL Noise Cancellation Select esses 253 NLP Non Linear Processing Adjust serere LO oe y Yee peer n Gp Gp Pe po 253 NOM Number of Open Microphones Mode 253 NTPSRV NTP Network Time Server 5 253 NULL Null the Telephone Line
262. of introducing delay applies to separate speaker enclosures located various distances from the listening area Other types of delay to consider when establishing delay parameters are delays which occur naturally as a result of processing within the unit Propagation delay is an example This delay is caused by operations such as the conversion of the signal between analog and digital formats Select the Enable Delay checkbox to enable it Calibrate the amount of delay using the Length and Temperature configuration controls Length is defined as the distance between the source and audience The Calculated Delay reading reflects any changes you make in the Distance and Temperature fields Click Close to save changes and return to the Process Channel window Pressing the Cmprs button opens the Channel Property Configuration window with the Compressor tab selected as shown below 130 Channel Property Configuration Process Select the Enable Compressor checkbox to activate the compressor Using the compressor you can change the gain transfer characteristics of the signal path and control the dynamics of a signal Compressor settings are described below Group Use the Group radio buttons to assign this compressor to a compressor group The default is None When you assign a compressor to a compressor group such as a group of two compressors configured for left and right stereo channels the compressors will monitor each other When
263. of the Converge Pro 880 and adds a built in telephone interface and power amplifier for standalone conferencing applications The 880T also provides industry leading expansion capabilities allowing you to connect it with other Converge Pro units for complex installations Advanced Telephone Conferencing Feature Set Signal Processing Improvements Telephone noise cancellation receive channel ClearEffect wideband emulation for speech enhancement Automatic level control receive channel Caller ID amp selectable ringers Advanced Conferencing Feature Set Next generation Acoustic Echo Cancellation Improved duplex performance Push to talk microphone compatibility Next generation Noise Cancellation Adaptive modeling to room ambient noise conditions Increased resolution on Microphone Preamp stage 0 56aB in 7 increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone
264. oggle NOM constant gain on or off toggle Mute on or off and use the Gain slider to set the gain level for the channel The Output Level meter shows the level for the channel in real time as you make configuration changes NOTE Changes to channel configuration settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Output 1 to Ceiling Speakers changes the name of the output channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console Creating Channel Objects One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Audio Devices and Channel Objects Channel objects contain all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Fe Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Obj
265. ol Input Volume Up Output 1 1 dB 14 Y Status Output 15 M Control Input Volume Down Output 1 1 dB 16 Y Status Output 17 Status Output Microphone 1 Gate Status 18 N Status Output Microphone 2 Gate Status 19 N Status Output Microphone 3 Gate Status 20 N Status Output Microphone 4 Gate Status 21 N Status Output Microphone 5 Gate Status 22 N Status Output Microphone 6 Gate Status 28 N Status Output Microphone 7 Gate Status 24 N Status Output Microphone 8 Gate Status 25 NA NA Ground 285 All Models Port B Female DB 25 oo FiO mno no Bom no no EE ES ES Ep EN KG On gt oo Oo or O ES 2 EE EM EM EM z 9 2 adaz EM gt B ntrol I nput Status Output Control 1 nput Status Output Control 1 nput Status Output Control 1 nput Status Output Control 1 nput Status Output Control nput Status Output Control 1 nput Status Output Control nput Status Output Control 1 nput Status Output Control 1 nput Status Output Control nput Status Output NA NA NA ALL MODELS RS 232 PORT d onan Fo mn LE EX 2 LM 2 EM ES NOTE To avoid communication errors ClearOne recommends using all nine pins when DCD RXD TXD DTR Ground DSR Crs RTS No conn
266. ol Status Ports Control Status A and B ports are female DB25 connectors used for General Purpose Input Output GPIO interactions between Converge Converge Pro devices and external control devices such as wall switches and push to talk microphones Control programming enables external control devices and controller software to access the Converge Converge Pro serial command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and running presets For more information on Control Status Port A and B and other physical connections see Controls and Connections Control Status Pin Programming Use the following procedure to program user definable pins 1 In the Control Status Pin Select section of the screen select port A or B from the Control Port drop down list Control Status Pin Select Control Status A np ire a2 PADAR a v Selected Pix Control Pin 2 Select the pin you want to configure from the Selected Pin drop down list Pin 1 is selected by default for Control Port A and Pin 21 is selected by default for Control Port B Control Pin State resemmomes ERORES 3 In the Control Pin State section of the screen press the Active Low Command or Inactive High Command button to select the pin state that you want to associate a command with Command Editor Command Descriptio
267. on sur Current Unit ent Unit 34 Converget40T 03 Ste View Tree View TIE 30 Converges40T 0 Q rod t 2 3 4 cmd Site Properties Prink Ste Report Prink Unit Report In Configuration Mode the Site Pane contains the Site Selection drop down list Site View tab and Tree View tab Right clicking in either the Site View tab or the Tree View tab brings up a context menu with site unit channel and reporting options applicable to the selected unit type 46 Preset Mask Control Status 13572901111 19 Mocro Selection m m In Preset Mode the Site Pane displays the Current Site Current Unit Preset Selection list and the Preset Name Description and Preset Mask entry fields Center Pane From Exp P From Exp From Exp R From Exp 8 From Exp T From Exp U c w 00 Pe gu eee AM 34 E Z ZECAC NXX c Ho2070 P EECXecMAX i PEEL ELL LLLLLLL ped Ded ped d pet oed d 2999 i The Center Pane displays the screen for the selected Console Tab As shown above the default screen is Unit Tab A 7 Objects Pane Il 35 dB Foder The Object Pane contains the AV Devices tab which allows you to select from a list of pre configured device settings and apply them instantly to a channel and the Objects tab whic
268. onfiguration Mode Overview Customer Service and Support 209 DEBUG CONSOLE The Debug Console provides five tabs for monitoring system performance testing and troubleshooting audio performance and running system diagnostics Meter View Gate View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Config Accessing Debug Console To access the debug console select Debug Console from the Services menu or press the Debug Console button on the Console Button Converge Console Site1 cnv View Add Connect Modes Services Help TT C8 33 SOBSURBED a co mew ClearOne ALL Unt Channel Metric AECReference Macro Gating Control string Event Scheduler Database SS ES a Current Unit pul Cone Tied Output 1 CONVERGE 80TA 0 2r Ste View Tree View FF i C I 65d n mom rn c G Pres L 2 9 010085 De 2 9 9 9555 eck CHR 2 99 505 o P s T v v w X t 1 Converge 55 0 1 4 LLLLLLLLE LL Det et de Configuration Ste Data Defaut M Unit Data Defaut M Not Connected Debug console tabs are described in the following sections Meter View Tab The Meter View tab provides eight user configurable level meters for monitoring signal levels on any channel in a site 210 Meter View Gate View Signal Generator System Checks System Check Co
269. or example to capture the currently displayed control pin programming as a control port object right click in the Control Status Pin Select portion of the of the Control Tab screen and select Export as object from the shortcut menu see below Control Status Pin Select Control Status A wr n a eree w anza CotuPot Sete m fi gt Control Pin Control Pin State acre coas WAOMUTE TRY 5 5 0 5 Nm Command Editer Command Descnpbon Sets Mute tor an input Output Processor Telco Rx Tx The Export Object dialog appears as shown below Assign the object a name and press Export Export Object Export GPIO as Mute Pin 1 Port 4 The control object now appears in the objects pane as shown below Objects The object is now available for drag and drop configuration AV Devices ClearOne provides numerous pre configured AV devices with settings that optimize the performance of the device for a typical baseline room These devices are available in the AV Devices tab of the Objects Pane as shown below Click a device type in the AV Device Tree to show the available devices of that type 170 To apply an AV device to a channel drag the object onto the channel in the Unit or Channel tabs For example to apply a Crown PCC130 tabletop microphone to Mic Line Input 1 select the object from the AV Devices tree and drag it onto the channel e Gain A Ni
270. orange rectangle From the menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Ans Process Channel _ oe Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below Objects 9 90 Mic S Line E Telco Rx i Output Ga Telco Tx 5 08 Processing ii Fader For more information on using AV devices and channel objects see the following topics AV Devices Creating AV Devices Channel Objects Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration 134 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Output Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings Telco Rx Settings Telco Tx Settings Drag amp Drop Configuration 135 FADER SETTINGS NOTE The Converge Pro 880TA and Converge SR 1212A do not have fader settings Fader Settings allow you to set configuration parameters for fader channels using the Channel tab Fader chan
271. ou to reference an output on another Converge Pro device in a site for Echo Cancellation and PA Adaption Filter A device that passes and blocks audio signals based on user definable requirements of the system All Pass A filter that provides only phase shift or phase delay without appreciably changing the magnitude characteristic The filter produces a flat amplitude response It is useful for matching the delay of two processing channels with different delays High Pass A filter that passes high signal frequencies while attenuating low frequencies High Shelving Provides boosting or attenuation of frequencies above a designated frequency The transition between the spectrum above and below the designated frequency occurs at a fixed 6dB octave rate The gain or loss above the corner frequency is adjustable to 15dB Low Pass A filter that passes low frequencies while attenuating high frequencies Low Shelving Provides boosting or attenuation of frequencies below a designated frequenoy The transition between the spectrum above and below the designated frequency occurs at a fixed 6dB octave rate The gain or loss below the corner frequency is adjustable to 15dB First Mic Priority Increases the audio level required to gate on additional microphones after the first mic is on This helps ensure that only one mic gates on when a person speaks Gain The amount a signal is increased over a given reference typically 0 normally specif
272. ough the front panel Command Form DEVICE DID Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 See Type And Device IDs Null sent in text Value returned DTMFLVL DTMF Tone Level This command selects reports the DTMF tone level Command Form DEVICE DTMFLVL Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text DTONELVL Dial Tone Level This command selects reports the audible dial tone level Command Form DEVICE DTONELVL lt Channel gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 17 R Value Signed Float 2 12 00 12 00 dB Null to query in text DUPDATE Download Update This command reports the status of download updates Command Form DEVICE DUPDATE Channel Group Status Percent Done Message Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Unsigned Integer 1 Group Unsigned Integer 1 Status Unsigned Integer 1 Null to query in text Percent Done Unsigned Integer 1 Message Char 60 DVER Command Dictionary Version This command reports the version of the command dictionary being used by the unit This command is read only Command Form DEVICE DVER Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 Sent with a Null in text 237 ENETADDR Ethernet Port IP Address This command s
273. oups 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command 12 CUSTOMER SERVICE AND SUPPORT ClearOne is committed to providing best in class customer service and support If you need assistance installing configuring or operating your Converge Pro system or if you have questions about ClearOne products or services please contact us at one of the locations listed below ClearOne also welcomes your comments and suggestions ClearOne on the Web Corporate Website www clearone com Sales Email sales clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com North America Worldwide Headquarters ClearOne Communications Edgewater Corporate Park South Tower 5225 Wiley Post Way Suite 500 Salt Lake City Utah 84116 USA Telephone 801 975 7200 Fax 801 977 0087 Toll Free 800 945 7730 Tech Support 800 283 5936 Latin America Telephone 801 975 7200 Fax 801 977 0087 Sales Email sales clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com EMEA Telephone 44 0 1189 036 053 Sales Email sales clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com Asia Pacific Japan Oceania Telephone 801 303 3388 Sales Email sales clearone com Tech Support Email tech support clearone com PRODUCT REGISTRATION Register your Converge Pro product s online at http Avw
274. outputs Converge Pro 8i 36 inputs x 24 outputs Converge Pro TH20 15 inputs x 15 outputs Converge SR 1212 36 inputs x 36 outputs Converge SR 1212A 38 inputs x 38 outputs For more information on connecting input and output devices see Controls and Connections Accessing the Matrix To access the matrix select the Matrix Tab from the Tab Bar in Console sole 8801 1 Add Connect Modes Servkes Boa FT ce 23 OP The matrix appears with the current routing configuration displayed for all channels The functionality of the matrix screen is described in the following sections Routing Legend 140 The routing legend shows the status of cross points using colored cells that mark the intersection or cross point of the routing from input to output The color of the cross point cell identifies the input type e Yellow gated mic input e Blue non gated mic input e Brown pre AEC e Green cross point NOTE The current audio level to the nearest dB is shown in cross point cells Black cell are restricted routing paths which prevent Telco E Bus Processing and Fader channels from being routed back to themselves Clear Matrix Button Clear Matrix Press the Clear Matrix button to clear ALL current matrix settings A Confirm dialog appears asking you to confirm the clear matrix operation Use caution when using this feature because the operation cannot be
275. ove button For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Dialer Button Bar Services Menu Overview 196 LABEL EDITOR The Label Editor allows you to quickly change the names labels assigned to units and channels Using descriptive names makes it easier to identify units and channels for configuration and management purposes Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced In addition to using the label editor to rename objects you can use the label entry fields provided throughout Console Accessing Label Editor To access the label editor select Label Editor from the Services menu or click the Label Editor B button on the Converge Button Bar Label Editor Using Label Editor As shown above the label editor contains one tab for each unit in the currently connected site To modify a label select the unit tab and click on the entry field for the object name that you wish to change When finished click the Ok button to save the changes and close the label editor window For additional information please refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Services Menu Overview Mic Input Settings Line Input Settings Telco Rx Settings Output Settings Telco Tx Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings 197 DEVICE LOG The Device Log captures device events for administration configuration and troubles
276. p down lists to select an AEC PA Adapt reference for each input channel as required for your application As shown above you can select any of the following as a reference source in the AEC PA Adapt References section of the screen Output channels 880 880T 880TA 840T TH20 SR 1212 SR 1212A Expansion bus channels Speaker outputs 880T 880TA 840T only e Virtual references 880 880T 840T TH20 SR 1212 SR 1212A Virtual AEC PA Adapt References Virtual AEC PA Adapt References allow you to combine multiple audio sources for applications where there are two speakers left and right providing audio combined audio video conferencing and audio video teleconferencing In these and other multiple output applications using virtual AEC PA Adapt references improves AEC performance Output Gain Tracking Virtual Ref 1 Output 7 Virtual Ref 2 Virtual Ref 3 None Y Virtual Ref 4 None requires a physical output reference to track output gain changes Therefore when using virtual AEC PA Adapt references you must use output gain tracking to provide level information to the AEC process Use the Output Gain Tracking section of the screen shown above to specify the level source for each virtual reference that you define Virtual AEC PA Adapt reference sources are defined in a special section of the Matrix shown below highlighted in white Use the white cross point area to select t
277. pe Do Command Macro Name Release 5 Converge 840 v macro 5 Do Command Macro Name Active State Converge saor macro aig 2 Status type aw Command Macro Inactive State 5 Converge 840 lo macro u E Clear Pressing a programmed button in the Web Portal executes the command selected in the Press row of the Command section Releasing a button executes the command selected in the Release row if applicable for the programmed command Configuring Control Console Conirol Console provides eight fader groups mixers with gain sliders mute buttons and level meters It also provides four user programmable buttons The fader groups can control multiple units in a site webBuilder Command Status i Select the fader group or user key you want to program from the drop down list in the upper left hand corner of the screen For fader groups you will also need to select Gain Mute or Meter from the second drop down list NOTE You can also select an element to program such as a gain slider or user button by selecting its graphical representation in the Control Console window For example in the screen shot above the meter element for Fader Group 1 is selected The LVLREPORT command associated with the meter will display real time level of fader group on the Converge Pro 840T unit DID 0 205 The element selected dete
278. put and applies the same processing to a corresponding Amp Channel All processing and audio information is applied to the Amp Channel For example if the feedback eliminator is enabled on PA channel 2 the feedback eliminator adds a new node That same feedback node will be added to the audio contained on PA Virtual Channel 2 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation Mic Input Settings Processing Settings Fader Settings 146 MACRO TAB Macros define a series of commands which can be run using the Front Panel LCD Serial Commands Control Ports Presets the Web Portal SNMP and other macros Macros allow you to make quick configuration changes and to execute multiple Presets simultaneously Macros can also contain commands that are executed on other units on the E bus All models support up to 255 macros with an average of 150 command lines each In the unlikely event that you exceed Console s memory capacity a warning appears indicating the command line at which memory is exceeded Accessing Macros To access macros press the Macro Tab on the Tab Bar in Console Boa 770 56 SOBSIBGY O87 s ClearOne Macro Selection 5m Command Editer Command Cecergton Oeseretion wo ane aos mot 5 There are two ways to create macros in Console the Macro Recorder which re
279. r selected processing block as shown above The meters and configuration controls for processing blocks are explained in the following sections Channel Label Processing A Process r Rename the channel by entering a name in the Label entry field optional Label changes are global and appear throughout Console wherever the label is referenced 128 Filter Pressing the Filter button brings up the Channel Property Configuration window with the Filter Tab selected as shown below Channel Property Configuration Process A Fitter Delay Compressor Filters Processing Channels BPO Table View Show Biclolelrleinl Bypass All Remove Fiter 15 C C C C Phase Add Filter Close For more information on Filters and their configuration use the Table of Contents to locate the Filters topic Press the Delay button to bring up the Channel Property Configuration window with the Delay Tab selected as shown below 129 Channel Property Configuration Process A Filter Delay Compressor Enable Delay Lenath Calculated Delay 2 0 00 ms s Temperature Feet Fahrenheit Inches C Celsius Metres Temperature Miliseconds 7000F Introducing an appropriate amount of delay to the forward mounted driver s re establishes the acoustical alignment necessary for proper sound imaging in a room The same principle
280. r site 6 Global Gating Groups 4 Internal Gating Groups Matrix Mixing Parameters 8 Microphone Analog Inputs 4 Analog Line Inputs 8 Analog Line Outputs 4 Power Amplifier Outputs 18 Expansion Bus in out 8 Processing Blocks Assignable Processing Blocks Filters All Pass Low Pass Low shelving High shelving PEQ Notch Crossovers Compressor Delay up to 250 msec Power Amplifier Output Processing Feedback Elimination w ring cancellation 10 band EQ filter 4 node filter bank for crossover Delay Block Compressor Limiter Noise Gate for Hiss Control Sound Masking Generator per channel Adaptive Volume Control Multi Channel Control Microphone Processing 4 node filter bank AGC ALC Power Amplifier Channels 4 Amplifier Output 35 Watt into 8 ohm Impedence Selectable 8ohm 70V 100 V THD Noise 296 1 3 Power 292 Crosstalk 68dB Telco Line Port RJ 11 POTS plain old telephone service or analog PBX extension A lead supervision provided Telco Set Port Pass though RJ 11 analog jack Telephone Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with Transmit Limiter and Receive ALC disabled Frequency Response 250Hz to 3 3 kHz 1dB THD N 0 396 re max level 250 Hz to 3 3 kHz e SNR gt 62 dB re max level Telco Line Echo Cancellation Tail Time 31ms Null 55 dB nomin
281. reboot Step 6 Units are fully upgraded Step 7 Verify units have been upgraded by check firmware version on the front panel 287 APPENDIX C SPECIFICATIONS CONVERGE PRO 880 Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 22 kHz BW max gain Rs 150 THD N 0 0296 Dynamic Range 7100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk 91 dB re 20 dBu 9 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features Number of Open Microphones NOM PA Adaptive Mode First Mic Priority Mode Last Mic Mode Maximum of Mics Mode Ambient Level Gate Threshold Adjust Off Attenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features 36x36 matrix 12analog in out 12 expansion bus in out e 8 assignable processing blocks in out e 4 assignable fader blocks in out Assignable Processing Blocks Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley Compressor Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration Input Gain Adjust Micor Line Level Phantom Power on off Echo Cancellation on off Noise Cancellation on off Filters All Pass 288 Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off
282. reference for AEC See also PA Adaptive Mode and AEC Parametric Equalizer PEQ A multi band variable equalizer with control of gain center frequency and bandwidth A properly configured PEQ enables Converge Pro devices to offset speaker anomalies and room acoustic imaging deficiencies Phantom Power Power supplied by Converge Pro units to power condenser microphones This feature can be switched off for microphones that do not require phantom power Pink Noise An audio test signal containing all the frequencies in a given audio spectrum with equal energy in each octave Pre AEC Cross Point Setting a Pre AEC Cross Point in the Matrix bypasses the cross pointed input audio from the AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation reference This is primarily used for sound reinforcement applications to prevent mic input channel audio from being degraded by AEC artifacts See also AEC and Matrix Mixer Preset Presets provide the configuration flexibility needed to meet changing conference room requirements These changes include audio routing gating muting levels AEC referencing and signal processing as well as room combining and room configuration Presets allow you to make configuration changes instantaneously without interrupting or affecting any conferences in progress There are 32 presets available on every Converge Pro device Preset Mask Defines whether a Preset executes on a low or high contact closure signal on the rear panel of the unit
283. rgument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 23 5 7 12 16 17 I J O M P L F T R Position Meter Type 2 See Meter Type Definitions Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Off Delete from list being reported 1 On Add to list being reported 2 Toggle Null to query in text LVLREPORTEN Level Report Enable Enables level reporting for the unit Command Form DEVICE LVLREPORTEN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 Turn off reporting but leave current list 1 Turn on reporting 2 Turn off reporting and clear the list Null to query in text MACRO Macro Execution Reporting This command executes a specified macro or reports the last macro executed Command Form DEVICE MACRO Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Channel 4 See 14 C in Groups and Channels Null to query last macro ran in text NOTE The response will indicate successful execution of the macro but it does not guarantee that each command in the macro was executed MANUFACTURER Manufacturer Identification Label This command selects reports the model identification label of the specified channel Command Form DEVICE MANUFACTURER Channel Group Reserved Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 2 9 7 I O M L Reserved Unsigned 2 0 Integer Label String 16 1 16 characters dB CL
284. rid Enhancements 880T 880TA 840T TH20 Custom telephone line settings for international teleconferencing and in country localization Type amp Type Il auto sensing telephone interface U S and E U International impedance matching Improved TEC Telco Echo Cancellation with 31 millisecond tail time Continual TEC adaptation to telephone line conditions ClearEffect wideband audio emulation algorithm Digital anti alias filter minimizes CO switching noise and hum ALC Automatic Level Control on telco receive channel Improved call management and processing Adjustable dial tone DTMF attenuation Off hook DTMF generation Robust dial tone detection Caller ID amp selectable ringers Touch tone dialing capability 44 character dial string Analog telephone line compatibility 10 W speaker amplifier 880T 880TA 840T Custom ring cadence detect IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Read all safety information before using this product Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two b
285. rmines the commands available in the Command drop down lists in the Command section of the screen Command Associated with Functon Mute Tye Do Command Macro ame Prest jo 00v Command DN Type Owo Grop Acesse a o Status imn State JF A aF zi z _ For example the commands available for the mute buttons include MACRO MUTE When you select command the configurable parameters for that command appear as shown above For more information on the command editor see Command Editor in the Control Tab topic Select the Type DID device ID and Command from the drop down lists After selecting a command and configuring its parameters press the Apply button to save the button programming To clear a command press the Clear button For some commands such as MACRO the Status section of the command editor becomes active Status controls the LED status indicator for the associated button based on the state conditions entered in the Active State LED on and Inactive State LED off rows of the Status section Command Associeted with Function User Defined Button Type Command Macro Name Press 3 Converge 840 lo macro n 3 Command rype Command Macro Name Release 5 Converge 840 macro mig si Active State 3 Converge asor lc macro B E Status Type Command Macro Nome Inactive State 3 8
286. rom within Console or by using any external control device Typically you will create a macro for each room configuration group of presets that you want to execute at the same time Preset Execution Flags Console uses user selectable preset flags to determine the current execution state of a preset This gives you complete control over preset execution and allows you to combine multiple presets in a macro or multiple macros while ensuring that only the presets required for a given room configuration are executed when needed The three user selectable execution flags are 0 do not execute the preset and set the execution state to off 1 check Preset state If off execute preset and set Flag to on If on do nothing 2 ignore execution state Execute the preset and set the execution state to off When an execution flag is set to on the associated preset cannot be executed Conversely when it is set to off the preset can be executed To query the current execution flag state for a preset use the PRESET command with the preset number and no other arguments Preset Control Masking In traditional room combining applications one preset is created and executed for each room configuration This can cause volume levels mute states and other channel configuration settings to reset for all room sections when a preset is executed In addition conferences in progress in unaffected room sections lose any custom settings and the
287. rs after gain and filter settings in the audio signal path The configuration controls for AGC are described in the following sections Maximum Gain Slider Set the Target Level first then set the Maximum Gain that you want the AGC to apply to the signal Maximum Gain is set using an RMS Root Mean Square level which is the average magnitude of the audio signal over time Maximum Gain range is 0 to 18 in 1dB steps The default value is Target Level Slider Target Level RMS sets cB level for AGC to maintain Target Level range is from 30 to 20cB 1dB steps The default target level is Active Gain Meter The Active Gain Meter displays the gain adjustment being applied to the channel by AGC Response Time Slider Response Time sets the amount of time in milliseconds over which the level is averaged before AGC is activated or deactivated Threshold Slider Threshold sets the dB level at which AGC engages The Threshold is set using an RMS Root Mean Square level which is the average magnitude of the audio signal over time NOTE Setting the Threshold above the background noise level will prevent AGC from amplifying background noise For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation NC Noise Cancellation Mic Gating Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings 92 MIC GATING The Gate button on t
288. rts PA adaptive mode for the specified Mic Command Form DEVICE PAA Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Off 1 2 Null to query text PACEN PA Softclipper Enable This command changes enables the softclipper function on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE PACEN Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 0 Off Short 1 20n 2 Toggle Null to query in text PAENERGY PA Energy saver mode This command switches the 36 volt rails off and on for the power amplifier It is intended to be used for a low power or energy saving mode Command Form DEVICE PAENERGY Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 0 Energy Saver Mode OFF Power Amp On Short 1 Energy Saver Mode ON Power Amp Off Null to query in text 256 PAEQEN PA EQ Filter Enable This command enables the EQ filter on a PA Channel Command Form DEVICE PAEQEN lt Channel gt Group Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned 2 0 Off Short 12 2 Toggle Null to query in text PAEQRST PA EQ Filter Reset This command res
289. s displayed in the Object Pane on the right side of the screen The Database Button Bar is located at the bottom of the Center Panel These components are described in the following sections NOTE Advanced object types are not viewable in the Database Tab Database Button Bar The Database Button Bar shown below allows you to create save delete export import upload and download AV Devices and Objects Buttons available change based on the device object selected and the status of the configuration screen displayed in the center pane Upload All Devices Download All Devices Click the Report button to view and print a report of all AV devices 161 AV Devices AV devices allow you to save pre defined configurations for a particular type of device such as a ceiling microphone To access AV devices expand the AV Device Tree in the AV Devices Tab in the Object Pane on the right side of Console Click on a device in the tree to display its configuration in the center pane For example the default settings for a ClearOne tabletop microphone are shown below AV Devices Objects ReadOnly AV Devices Audio T ATS47R A Audio T 851 Audio T EP9STP fv Enable Phantom Power NN Audio ES947 S Beyer MPC22 BeyerD SW A BeyerD MPCESV SW Clock Audio CS1 A Clock Audio CS2 N Clock Audio CS3 S Crown PCCT30 N Shure MX392C N Push to Tak AN Audo T ATSSTR A BeyerD
290. s Ports DB 25 female A B 2 Inputs A B active low pull to ground Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software Converge Console Power Input Range Auto Adjusting 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 30 W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 17 25 x 10 25 x 1 75 43 8x 26x 4 5 cm Weight e 7 5 lbs 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 lbs 5 4kg shipping weight Operating Temperature e 14 F 10 C to 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals See Appendix D Compliance AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 840 Converge Pro 840T 4 Channel AEC Microphone Mixer with Telephone Hybrid and 10W Amplifier 295 CONVERGE PRO 8l Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 22 kHz 1dB Noise EIN 126 dBu 20 kHz BW max gain e Rs 150 Q THD N 0 0296 e Dynamic Range 7100 dB non A weighted Crosstalk 91 dB re 20 dBu 9 20 kHz channel to channel Auto Mixer Features Number of Open Microphones NOM PA Adaptive Mode First Mic Priority Mode Last Mic Mode Maximum of Mics Mode Ambient Level Gate Threshold Ad
291. se the Files of type drop down list to open G ware files PSR file extension and convert them to convert G ware site files to Converge site files Site Selection Current Unit 34 Converget40T 03 Ste View Tree view The selected site file is now available for use You can open up to four site files simultaneously and switch between them using the Site Selection drop down list 50 Saving Site Files To save the current Site configuration parameters including any changes made since the active Site file was opened click the Save button al on the Button Bar or select Save or Save As from the File menu For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Create A Site Connect to a Site Site Properties Console Overview Configuration Mode Overview Channel Tab Overview Matrix Tab 51 CONNECT TO A SITE Connect To a Site Click the Connect button Lj on the Console Button Bar or select Connect from the Connect Menu The Connect dialog appears as shown below Connect Pull Data from Unit to Current Document Create New Document and Connect to Site Connect to Site and Push Current Document USB Connection IP Connection Device Information Connection USB Device Name ConvergeSRA C8 Device Type Converge SR12124 Device ID 0 Connection options include To automatically create a n
292. sed to connect an external speaker 8O Four 35 Watt internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier NOTE To reduce risk of electrical shock and damage to equipment never connect wiring or external equipment while the amplifier is power is on Class 2 wiring is required Maintain the correct polarity on output connectors For example Channel 1 positive speaker lead connects to amplifier s channel 1 positive terminal Channel 1 negative speaker lead connects to amplifier s channel 1 negative terminal Repeat this procedure for each channel 28 11 Telco Line and Telco Set Ports Two RJ 11 connectors telephone ports The Telco Line port connects an analog telephone line to Converge Pro devices The Telco Set port provides a pass through connection for telephone handsets 880TA 880T 840T TH20 NOTE The Telco Set port is not available for use when the telephone hybrid is off hook 12 Amplifier Terminal Block 880TA SR 1212A 12 speaker terminals used to connect an external speaker 70 100 v Four 35 Watt internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier NOTE To reduce risk of electrical shock and damage to equipment never connect wiring or external equipment while the amplifier is power is on Class 2 wiring is required Maintain the correct polarity on output connectors For example Channel 1 70 100V speaker lead connects to amplifier s channel 1 70V or
293. sion bus in out Bassignable processing blocks in out 4assignable fader blocks in out 1 10W speaker amplifier e 1 telco input 1 telco output Assignable Processing Blocks Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley Compressor Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration Input Gain Adjust Micor Line Level Phantom Power on off Echo Cancellation on off Noise Cancellation on off Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off Chairman Override on off 290 AGC on off Automatic Level Control on off Auto Gate Manual gate Adaptive Ambient on off Pre AEC channel Mic Line Inputs 1 8 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to 0 dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment Maximum Level 65 dBu to 4 20 dBu Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 9 12 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO vNominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 12 Push on mini terminal block balanced Impedance 50 Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 2
294. slation of plain text internet domain names URLs into numeric IP addresses DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Dialing DTMF or touch tone dialing allows users to issue tones for access to voice mail pagers etc DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Level A setting in the Channel Property Configuration window for Telco Rx channels used to adjust the level volume of the DTMF tones that are heard when dialing Level can be adjusted in 1dB steps to 12dB EC Echo Canceller Reference A signal that contains an electronic copy of all signals which will be removed from the signal the mics pick up This is always the far end audio and optionally local audio sources EC Echo Canceller Reference Summing The ability to combine multiple signals in a single echo cancellation reference signal See also Virtual Reference ERL Echo Return Loss The ERL meter shows the coupling between the reference signal and the input to the echo canceller the ratio of the two levels ERLE Echo Return Loss Enhancement The echo return loss enhancement ERLE meter shows the loss through the echo cancellation and NLP non linear processing chain the ratio of the two levels Expansion Bus Consists of two RJ 45 connectors the Link In and Link Out ports on the rear panel of all Converge Pro models The Expansion Bus allows multiple Converge Pro devices to be linked together using CAT 5 twisted pair cable Expansion Bus Reference The Expansion Bus Reference allows y
295. ss It is the ratio of the two levels Threshold The upper or lower level at which a signal processing begins or terminates Unit Properties Unit Properties define properties for a specific Converge Pro unit Unit Properties enable you to configure unit settings such as name and telephone country code as well as IP and serial communication settings See also Site Properties Virtual AEC Reference Virtual AEC References allow you to combine multiple audio sources for applications where there are two speakers left and right combined audio video conferencing and audio video teleconferencing In these and other multiple output applications using virtual AEC references improves AEC performance Web Builder Web Builder consists of User Console and Control Console These consoles allow you to configure a subset of call management User Console and mixing features Control Console for access through a web portal integrated into the Converge Pro firmware The web portal can be accessed over IP with Microsoft s Internet Explorer web browser requires IE version 5 5 or later White Noise Acoustical noise with equal energy throughout a given frequency range 315
296. t Level N A Level post gain Level A 2 adjustment but Pest Gein Post Gain level Feci LAU Pesi Celi post gain level level level pre filter adjustment Level post filter but pre gate Level after 3 non gated Gain Stage N A evel Level post gate G 4 gated level N A N A N A N A N A Echo Return Loss Not SR R 5 1212 SR N A N A 1212A Echo Return Loss E 6 Enhancement N A N A N A N A N A Not SR 1212 SR 12124 ERL ERLE T 7 Not SR 1212 N A 5 1212 8 ae Kee AGC N A N A N A po Pre AGC Y 10 PIGAGC peak N A N A evel meter meter Post AGC 7 pese eoe sakia N A N A evel meter meter B 12 Ambient N A N A Room Loss 13 RETURNS 0 s N A N A N A A N A FOR NOW gt Level Position for Amp Level Position for Processors Numeric Alpha Level into Compressor Input Level Post NOM A 2 Level Post Output Level Compressor Post Gain N 3 Level Post Gain Feedback Max Stage Auto Gain G 4 N A Compressor Attenuation R 5 Level Pre Comressor E 6 Level Post Compressor T 7 N A Adaptive Gain 220 Alpha Numeric Level Position for Level Position for Processors Amp C 9 N A Level of Adaptice Gain Noise Floor Y 10 N A Level Post Mute Gain Pre EQ 11 N A N A 12 N A N A 13 N A N A 221 SERIAL COMMAND INDEX AA Auto Answer Enable Disable
297. t Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 3 M Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 0dB 7 14 14 dB 21 21 dB 28 28 dB 35 35 41 41 qB 50 50 dB 56 56 dB Null to query text No other values are valid and accepted MMAX Maximum Number of Microphones This command selects reports the maximum number of microphones for a Gating Group Command Form DEVICE MMAX Channel Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 4 Value Unsigned Integer 2 0 Unlimited 1 8 Maximum of Mics Null to query in text 252 MODEL Model Identification Label This command selects reports the model identification label of the specified channel Command Form DEVICE MODEL Channel Group Reserved Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Group Group 1 1 21 f I M L Reserved Unsigned 2 0 Integer Label String 16 1 16 characters dB CLEAR clear the label Null to query in text MTRX Matrix Routing This command selects reports the matrix routing of an input to an output Command Form DEVICE MTRX lt Src Ch Src Gp Dest Ch Dest Gp Value Argument Type Size Values Units Source Channel Channel 1 See Groups and Channels Source Group Group 1 1 3 5 6 7 12 17 l M BE L F R Destination Channel Channel 1 See Groups an
298. t and executed when the preset is ran Channels that are not selected remain unchanged after preset execution UPDATE SS E In the example above Input 1 and Input 3 are selected for use in the preset and routed to Output 1 with gating enabled and a cross point level adjustment of zero Cross points are also set for Output 1 on the Process A and Fader 1 channels For AEC PA Adapt reference changes in a preset you can also select channels in the Use in preset row as shown below Note that only the channels selected and cross pointed in the matrix are available and that they are selected by default 176 Creating Presets Use the following procedure to create presets 1 Press the Preset Mode button on the Button Bar to put Console into preset mode 2 Select the number of the preset you want to configure in the Preset Selection list 4 Select the channels you want to include in the preset using the Use in preset check boxes in the matrix 177 5 Setthe output channel cross points that you want to include in the preset using the matrix 6 Configure the desired setting changes for the preset including Mic Input Line Input Output Telco Rx Telco Tx Processing and Fader channel settings Gating settings Control settings AEC PA Adapt Reference settings 7 Click on the Preset Mask Control Status B boxes to set the pin states High L Low required to trigger preset execution optional S
299. t onto the matrix in the Matrix Tab screen For more information on using AV devices and objects refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Controls and Connections Channel Tab Overview Expansion Bus Overview NOM Mic Gating Filters Processing Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings Telco Rx Settings Output Settings Telco Tx Settings Fader Settings 143 AEC REFERENCE PA ADAPT REFERENCE TAB The AEC Reference 880 880T 880TA 840T 8i TH20 PA Adapt Reference SR 1212 SR 1212A Tab allows you to establish reference sources for Acoustic Echo Cancellation AEC and PA Adaptation AEC uses reference signals as the basis for acoustic echo cancellation An AEC reference is a digital sample of the receive audio signal that is used by the AEC filter model for adaptation and convergence A PA Adapt Reference allows you to specify an output as the ambient reference to prevent an audio signal from gating on microphones without interfering with speech from conference participants You can use both unit and expansion bus audio sources as AEC and PA Adapt references for the Mic Inputs connected to a unit In addition you can define virtual reference sources that combine multiple audio signals into a single AEC PA Adapt reference source Virtual references improve AEC performance in stereo speaker and combined audio video conferencing applicatio
300. t together when three smaller rooms are combined into a larger room When the rooms are divided again the audio from one room will not be available in the other two rooms due to the Audio Master configuration In graphic above the third unit in the network is an Audio Master with an RS 232 control device attached Audio from the first and second units in the network does not pass beyond the second unit Likewise the second Audio Master unit in the network does not pass audio from the unit before it Sites can use multiple RS 232 devices which you can connect to any unit regardless of Control Slave or Master designations Serial control is not affected by Audio Master or Slave designations Global serial control of the site is maintained by the unit connected to a control device through its RS 232 port in this case the third unit in the stack which is also designated as the first Audio Master in the network NOTE A master unit is not required for Converge Converge Pro sites and in most installations all units will be slaves Also SNMP Control is not affected by Audio Master designations For information about the Link In and Link Out connections used to build sites see Controls amp Connections Room Enter a descriptive name for the room in the Room field Default Meter amp Channel Select an input output or processing channel to be the Default Meter on the front panel LED Meter when a channel is not specifically selected Front Pa
301. tab selected in the Site Pane All units that are connected and belong to the site also appear in the Tree View tab The Unit tab display for other Converge Converge Pro unit types will vary from that shown depending on the number of inputs outputs telco connections etc for the model selected Unit Tab Functionality The graphical elements shown in the block diagram of the Unit tab provide shortcuts to the basic configuration settings for each channel type For full configuration control of a channel use the Channel tab For all channels in the Unit tab display the blue Pres Audio Presence LEDs illuminate to indicate the presence of audio on the channel For Mic Input Channels the green Gate LEDs illuminate to indicate that the Mic is gated on The following sections describe the configuration setting shortcuts available in the Unit tab 65 Input Channel Settings MiC Line Pres Gain AEC NC Mute Gate Spt a Jm Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output amp C BY Speaker Telco RX Pres Gain NC NOM Mite Gan Pres Telco TX Q La D o GN mm Telco TX Pointing to an input channel on the left side of the screen highlights it in orange and shows the routing for the channel in white on the right side of the screen shown above Clicking the channel selects it and displays the routing to other units in the site by channel type in the site pane shown below Site View Tree
302. tage 0 56aB in 7 increments Pre AEC routing for sound reinforcement applications A maximum processing delay of four 4 milliseconds Management Improvements Integrated Ethernet and USB connections SNMP and HTML remote management agents with SMTP email alerts Web based user and management control consoles Event scheduler Diagnostic console Simplified Configuration Software Drag amp drop A V and channel objects Selectable Console views Unit Matrix and Channel Expanded serial command set Superior Audio Performance Next generation Distributed Echo Cancellation on every microphone input First microphone priority delivers clear audio to the far end 20Hz 22kHz bandwidth for full range audio response AGC amp ALC to keep all participants audio levels balanced and consistent Configuration Flexibility Scalable link up to 34 Converge Pro units together for up to 96 microphones and 16 telephone lines Enhanced expansion bus featuring 18 mix minus audio buses for routing between units Ten microphone gating groups four internal amp six global allow separation of microphones into individual mixer gating groups for greater configuration flexibility 32 user programmable presets can each be executed without disturbing other ongoing preset operations 255 Macros for customized audio control and configuration using a single command Converge Pro 880T The 880T leverages the rich functionality
303. ted in the Center Pane select the desired Mic Input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane and press the NC button located just below the Coarse Gain slider Mode Configuration Ste Data Detak Unt Data Defaut Not Connected Ste Unt Convergece0TAQ0 Device ID 0 The Channel Property Configuration screen appears with the NC tab selected as shown below 84 Configuring Noise Cancellation Select the Enable Noise Canceller checkbox to enable NC for the channel Adjust the Cancellation Depth slider to the setting which provides the best combination of low noise and maximum speech clarity The cancellation depth can also be set using the arrow buttons or by entering a value directly in the field The attenuation depth can be set in 1dB increments from to 15dB The default is 6dB The default NC is Off For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control Mic Gating Filters Mic Input Settings Telco RX Settings TH20 840T 880 880T 880TA 85 FILTERS Filters enable you to shape the audio signals from Mic Input channels for improved audio quality There are four configurable filter types available All Pass High Pass Low Pass Notch PEQ Parametric Equalizer Accessing Filters With the Channel tab select
304. teger See GroupAndChannels Group Value String 4 99 90 99 90 dB Null to query in text Absol 0 A Absolute Rel R Relative Null Relative 250 MCMINMAX Multi Channel Min and max Gain Setting This command changes or reports back the minimum and maximum gain setting for a channel Command Form DEVICE MCMINMAX Channel Group Value Min Max Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Group 2 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel See GroupAndChannels Group Value Signed Short 2 65 00 20 00 dB Null to query in text Max Signed Short 2 65 00 20 00 dB MCMUTE Multi Channel Min and Max Gain Setting This command performs reports audio mutes of the grouped channels Command Form DEVICE MCMUTE lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 n Max number of channels in Multi Channel Group divided by 2 Group Group 1 128 No text group Multi Group 1 Only 23 J accepted for now Channel See GroupAndChannels Group Value Unsigned Char 1 0 Off 1 On 2 Toggle Null to query in text MCRAMP Multi Channel Ramp This command performs audio gain ramps of the grouped channels There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE MCRAMP Channel Multi Channel Group Rate Target Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 n
305. tenuation Adjust Hold Time Decay Rate Matrix Mixing Features 29x30 matrix 8 analog in out 1 speaker out amplified 12 expansion bus in out 4assignable processing blocks in out 4assignable fader blocks in out 1 telco in out Assignable Processing Blocks Filters All pass Low pass High pass Low shelving High shelving Parametric EQ Notch CD Horn Crossovers Bessel Butterworth Linkwitz Riley Compressor Delay adjustable up to 250 ms Assignable Fader Blocks Gain Mute Microphone Input Configuration Input Gain Adjust Micor Line Level Phantom Power on off Echo Cancellation on off Noise Cancellation on off Filters All Pass Low Pass High Pass Notch PEQ Mute on off Chairman Override on off 294 on off Automatic Level Control on off Auto Gate Manual gate Adaptive Ambient on off Pre AEC channel Mic Line Inputs 1 4 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level adjustable 56 dBu to 0 dBu 7 dB step coarse gain adjustment Maximum Level 65 dBu to 4 20 dBu Echo Cancellation 130 ms tail time works with 12 dB of room gain Noise Cancellation 6 15 dB attenuation Phantom Power 24 V selectable Line Inputs 5 8 Push on mini terminal block balanced bridging Impedance lt 5 KO Nominal Level 0 dBu Maximum Level 20 dBu Outputs 1 8
306. th Converge Pro Devices ONLY Connecting ANY other devices to the Link In and Link Out ports including ClearOne XAP or PSR1212 products or Power Over Ethernet PoE devices will result in severe equipment damage 7 RS 232 Serial Port Female DB9 connector for connecting to a laptop computer or remote control serial devices such as AMX and Crestron controllers NOTE Converge Console software cannot connect via the RS 232 port use USB or Ethernet 8 Control Status A and B Ports Two female DB25 connectors used for GPIO interactions between Converge Pro devices and external control devices such as wall switches and push to talk microphones This enables external devices and controller software to access the Converge Pro command set including common functions such as volume control muting room combining and preset changes 9 PC and LAN Ethernet Ports Two RJ 45 10 100Mbps auto sensing Ethernet ports The LAN port connects Converge Pro devices to a network The PC port provides a pass through network connection for use with standard not crossover patch cable The LEDs adjacent to each port indicate connection status and packet traffic activity 10 Speaker Posts 880T 840T Amplifier Terminal Block 880TA SR1212A e 880T 840T Two post banana plug connectors used to connect an external speaker 40 160 Internal power amplifiers eliminate the need for an external power amplifier 880TA SR 1212A 8 speaker terminals u
307. thernet Network Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet PC Port RJ 45 Connectors 298 RS 232 Serial Command Protocol Only Console software not supported on RS 232 port DB 9 female 9 600 19 200 38 400 57 600 115 200 baud rate 8 bits 1 stop bit no parity Hardware flow control on default off USB Version 2 0 compatible B connector Control Status Ports DB 25 female A B 2 Inputs active low pull to ground Outputs A B open collector 40 VDC max 40 mA each 3 3 VDC pins 2 300 mA over current protected Configuration amp Administration Software Converge Console Power Input Range Auto Adjusting 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Power Consumption 30W Typical Dimensions L x D x H 17 25 x 10 25 x 1 75 e 43 8x 26 x 4 5 Weight 7 5 105 3 3375 kg unit weight e 12 Ibs 5 4kg shipping Operating Temperature e 14 10 C to 122 F 50 C ambient unit temperature Approvals See Appendix D Compliance AES48 2005 AES standard on interconnections Grounding and EMC practices Shields of connectors in audio equipment containing active circuitry self certified Part Number 910 151 820 Converge Pro TH20 Telephone Hybrid for Converge Pro 880 880T 840T 8i and Converge SR 1212 CONVERGE SR 1212 Audio Performance Conditions Unless otherwise specified all measurements are performed with a 20 Hz to 22 kHz BW limit no weighting Frequency Response 20 Hz to 2
308. they have no effect on any gating group When gating groups span two or more units global gating groups the settings must be the same for each unit attached to the global gating group NOTE Input channels can be assigned to one and only one Gating Group at a time Mic Inputs are routed to Global Group A by default To assign a gating group select an Internal or Global radio button in the Gating Group section of the screen or select None to have the Mic Input gate independently of any gating group Gating Group None r tierno 3E Se eA een ae ig J m Post Gate Meter Post Gate 20 The Post Gate Meter displays the audio level of the selected channel after Auto or Manual Gating settings are applied Meter range is from 30 to 20dB 95 For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Gating Tab AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control NC Noise Cancellation Filters Line Input Settings Mic Input Settings 96 MIC INPUT SETTINGS Mic Input Settings enable you to customize mic input channel settings using the Channel screen Accessing Mic Input Settings With the Channel tab selected on the Tab Bar select the desired mic input channel on the Tree View tab in the Site Pane D Core 0 0 A Lu ret ode Confguaton Ste Data Deiak M reca M tt Corrected BEEBE BEB Sze tord
309. ting priority for chairman override enabled microphones within the same gating group When a mic with chairman override gates on all mics that don t have chairman override enabled and are in the same gating group will gate off Clear Effect To reduce bandwidth requirements telephone lines limit audio bandwidth to a range of 300Hz 3 3kHz ClearEffect enhances the incoming signal from a telephone line to emulate wideband audio by adding high and low frequencies to the audio signal creating a richer fuller sound All output signals routed from an input channel with ClearEffect enabled are routed as wideband audio 310 Clipping Clipping occurs when a signal level exceeds the maximum level a circuit can handle This is usually caused by improper gain settings Clipping causes distortion listener fatigue and accelerated failure of speakers Compression An induced reduction in the dynamic range of all or part of an audio signal Compression is usually used to protect individual loudspeaker components from damage caused by transient peaks in audio signals Compressor A signal processor used to perform compression and control the dynamic range of an audio signal Control Bus Part of the Expansion Bus the Control Bus passes control information to the units Control is not affected by audio master slave settings and will continue to function even if the units are not using the audio channels See also Expansion Bus Crossover A device that passes des
310. tion settings made in the channel routing matrix apply globally to that channel For example changing the label name from Input 1 to Podium Mic in the Mic 1 entry box changes the name of the channel in the Tree View pane and everywhere else the label appears in Console 125 Creating Channel Objects One of the most powerful features of Console is the ability to create Channel Objects Channel objects capture all settings for the channel at the time the object is created After configuring an input using the Channel tab as described in this topic you can save it into the Database and use drag and drop configuration to streamline configuration tasks To save an input channel configuration right click in the Channel screen anywhere above the channel routing matrix From the menu that appears select Export Object as shown below Apply to all NOTE You can apply the channel configurations for the current channel to all channels of the same type by selecting the Apply to all option Use this option with caution because there is no way to undo the changes Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Trico Tx 1 CTE _ cw Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below Objects Mic S Line E T
311. tring 64 Null to query in text 238 ENETGATE Ethernet Default Gateway Address This command selects reports the default gateway of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETGATE Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text ENETSUBN Ethernet Subnet Mask This command selects reports the Subnet mask of the Ethernet port on the unit Command Form DEVICE ENETSUBN Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value IP Address 4 Null to query in text EREF Expansion Bus Reference This command selects an output or reports which output is the expansion bus reference Command Form DEVICE EREF Channel Value Channel Value Group Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See Reference Channels in Groups and Channels Group Group 1 8 A E Value Channel 1 0 none See 2 20 O B in Groups and Channels Null to query in text Value Group 1 0 for none or 2 20 N for none or B EVENT Run Scheduled Event This command manually runs a scheduled event on a unit There is no query associated with this command Command Form DEVICE EVENT Channel lt Group gt Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 1 10 Group Group 1 21 Q Reserved Unsigned Short 2 0 FE Feedback Elimination Enable This command enables or disables feedback elimination on the power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE FE Channel Group Value Ar
312. trix From the shortcut menu that appears select Export Object as shown below 33 Apply to all 115 Enter an appropriate Label name in the entry field of Export Object dialog as shown below Export Object Export Telco Rx 1 as Export Cancel Click Export to save the configuration to the database or Cancel to return to the Channel screen Telco Line Irl Console saves the object to the database and displays it in the Object Tree as shown below Objects Mic Podium Mic I PTT Microphone X Line E Telco Rx RH m 22 Output 3 Telco Tx Processing Fader For more information on using audio devices and channel objects refer to the Table of Contents for these topics AV Devices Creating AV Devices Channel Objects Database Tab Drag amp Drop Configuration Optimizing Input Gain Structure Optimizing gain structure for input channels maximizes the signal to noise ratio for the channel and ensures optimal audio performance When configuring the telco rx channel ClearOne recommends that you follow the procedures outlined in the Optimizing Gain Structure topic For more information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Channel Tab Overview NC Noise Cancellation Mic Gating Gating Tab AGC ALC Automatic Gain Control Automatic Level Control Label Editor Output Settings Telco Tx Settings 116
313. ts Preset Objects Accessing Drag and Drop Configuration To select objects for drag and drop configuration use the Objects Pane on the right side of Console The objects available in the objects pane vary depending on the tab selected on the Console Tab Bar For example when the Unit Tab is selected both AV devices and channel objects are available as shown below Converge Console Site1 cnv File View Add Connect Modes Services Help 7 E0 33 SORBSEBEHw Oa Em ClearOne MIC Line Pres _0 One Ga Pres Output Current Unit nut Y Output 1 CONVERGE80TA 0 Ste View Tree View mjc Jol e Kr IER e o 2 T v v w e gt zu H H s4 5 5 Converge 550 1 iode Configuration Se Data Defaut Unt Data Defaut Not Connected Last Macro Last Preset 0 Site 880 Unit CONVERGEBEOTA 0 Device ID Using Drag and Drop Configuration Drag and drop configuration is a three step process for all object types 1 Create an object 2 Store it in the Database 3 Drag the object from the Objects pane onto a channel or screen area as appropriate for the object type The following sections describe creating and applying objects in Console 169 Creating Objects With the exception of custom AV devices which can only be created using the Database Tab all objects can be created by right clicking on a screen and using the shortcut menu that appears F
314. tus Default Description 1 Y Control Input 2 Y Status Output 3 Y Control Input Mute All Mics Toggle 4 Y Status Output Status of Mute All Mics 5 Y Control Input Mute Output 9 Toggle 6 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 9 T Y Control Input Mute Output 10 Toggle 8 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 10 9 Y Control Input Mute Output 11 Toggle 10 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 11 ali Y Control Input Mute Output 12 Toggle 12 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 12 13 Y Control Input Volume Up Output 1 1 dB 14 Y Status Output 15 Y Control Input Volume Down Output 1 1 dB 16 Y Status Output 17 N Status Output Microphone 1 Gate Status 18 N Status Output Microphone 2 Gate Status 19 N Status Output Microphone 3 Gate Status 20 N Status Output Microphone 4 Gate Status 21 N Status Output Microphone 5 Gate Status 22 N Status Output Microphone 6 Gate Status 29 N Status Output Microphone 7 Gate Status 24 N Status Output Microphone 8 Gate Status 25 NA NA Ground 280 Converge Pro 880T Port A Female DB 25 User Definable Control Status Default Description Control Input 1 Y 2 Y Status Output 8 Y Control Input Mute All Mics Toggle 4 Y Status Output Status of Mute All Mics 5 Y Control Input Mute Output 9 Toggle 6 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 9 7 Y Co
315. ually used when the target audio is vocal 3 Wideband Masking operates throughout the audible range of the unit Filter Filters selected from the Power Amp channel are only applied to the amplifier Otherwise they operate in any combination consistent with the Processing channel filters Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Fiter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Mutichannel Control Processing Channels Snow 8 c 0 Active C C C 71 Feedback Launches the Feedback window Channel Property Configuration PowerAmp 1 Fiter Delay Compressor Feedback Noise Gate EQ Filter Limiter Mutichannel Contrat This feature allows you to reduce feedback through a simple configuration window 1 Enable Feedback Cancellation Enables or Disables the feature 2 Automatic Setup Creates notch filters based on your choice of Feedback Cancellation settings Target Gain Before Feedback Set your desired dB rating The unit slowly increases dB adding notch filters at detected feedback frequencies until it either reaches the target level or reaches the number of Fixed Filters specified in the Filter Settings Number of Fixed Filters The system detects feedback through an open mic while levels are increased If the target is reached without using the specified number of fixed filters the remaining slots are used as Dynamic Filters to be applied as the
316. udible Ringer Indication is turned on in the Telco Rx Channel Configuration window The ringer level can also be adjusted Audio Routing The process of routing input signals to output channels in the Matrix based on default or user defined cross points See also Matrix Automatic Gain Control AGC Automatically increases or decreases audio gain to maintain a consistent audio level Automatic Gating Automatically gates microphones on or off based on gating parameters set in the Mic Input Channel Configuration window Automatic Level Control ALC ALC can be selected for telco receive and mic input channels ALC keeps soft and loud telephone participants at a consistent level ALC can be turned on or off in the Telco Rx and Mic Input Channel Configuration windows The default is on for Telco Rx and on for mic inputs Bandwidth The difference between the lower and upper end points of an audio band Also the range or differences between the limiting frequencies of a continuous frequency band Baud Rate The number of signal transitions per second or the clock rate of the serial bit stream in hertz Given 7 or 8 bits for data plus start and stop the approximate ASCII character transmission rate is one tenth the baud rate CD Horn EQ Constant Directivity Horn Equalizer Horn drivers used in arenas and auditoriums have an inherent 6dB octave high frequency rolloff The CD Horn EQ compensates for this characteristic Chairman Override Provides ga
317. um gain setting that the algorithm will not exceed Command Form Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupsAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Signed Short 2 0 00 to 4 18 00 dB Null to query in text AVR Adaptive Volume Reference This command selects reports the microphone or expansion bus reference channel to be used for adaptive volume tracking on a power amplifier channel Command Form DEVICE AVR CHANNEL GROUP Argument Type Size Values Channel Channel 1 M 1 8 E 1 18 Null to query in text Group Group 1 3 6 M or E Units AVRT Adaptive Volume Ratio This command sets the ratio at which gain will be automatically applied based upon the ambient level in the reference microphone Example 1 1 setting would apply 1 dB of gain for every 1dB rise in ambient level of the reference microphone up to the Max Gain setting Command Form DEVICE AVRT lt Channel gt lt Group gt Value Argument Type Size Values Units Channel Channel 1 See GroupAndChannels Group Group 1 23 J Value Unsigned Short 2 0 2 1 Ratio de 2212 Null to query in text AVT Adaptive Volume Threshold This command sets the level at which the adaptive volume algorithm will be activated This value is referenced to the noise floor of the channel and the target above ambient for the adaptive volume to reach COMMAND FORM Device Channel Group Value Argument Type Size Valu
318. undone Audio Routing Matrix The numbers and letters along the top and left side of the matrix show the cross point coordinates The Labels for each channel are also shown to make them easy to identify As you move the cursor over the matrix the labels for the channels are highlighted in white for each cross point NOTE Clicking on a channel label opens the Channel screen for that channel allowing you to modify the channel label and change channel configuration settings as needed Input Routing To route an input to an output click in the routing matrix at the intersection between the input and the output A mic input can be designated as gated yellow non gated blue or pre AEC brown by clicking repeatedly in the cross point All other input cross points will be colored green Expansion Bus I Z Routing Audio from any unit on the E bus network can be placed on the bus or taken off the bus and routed to any 141 destination within the unit All models have 18 digital mix minus buses S Z Buses These eight audio buses are line input mixer buses They are used to route auxiliary audio such as from a CD player or VCR to and from other units on the network These buses are also used as mic mixer buses when NOM count is not required R Buses These ten audio buses are generally used for routing microphone audio between Converge Converge Pro devices Information about the number of gated microphones NOM count and other re
319. unit STRING Runs a command string SYSCHECKS Runs system diagnostics 2 To schedule a single event select Single Event and set the desired Start Date Time in the Time Scheduler section of the screen Time Scheduler Start Date Tene o 12 9 2008 bd C Event PEDE 3 To schedule a recurring event select Event Recurrence set the recurrence interval using the Recur Every fields and select either Maximum of Times or End Date Time to specify the number of repetitions or time period for event execution respectively NOTE Clicking on the arrow button next to a date entry field in the Time Scheduler section of the screen displays a calendar for date selection 4 Click the Apply button to schedule the event The event appears in the Scheduled Events List Scheduled Events Event io 2 5 Add additional events as required by repeating steps 1 through 4 6 To clear a single event highlight the event and press Clear To clear all scheduled events press the Clear All Events button Answer Yes in the Warning dialog that appears NOTE Events can also be viewed and scheduled via the Management page of the Web Portal For additional information refer to the Table of Contents for these related topics Macro Tab Preset Mode Overview Safety Mute String Tab System Checks Web Builder 160 DATABASE TAB NOTE Objects and Devices created in Console 1 0 4 and 1 1 5 are NOT compatible with Console 2 0
320. us of the connected telephone line Telco On Off Button amp LEDs The button connects disconnects the telephone line attached to the device the LEDs indicate the connection status of the line Amplifier On Off Switch 880TA SR 12124 Turns power to the unit on or off In addition to making configuration adjustments from the front panel you can also run macros and execute presets For more information on using front panel controls see Controls and Connections Adjusting LCD Menu Parameters Use the following procedure to adjust LCD Menu parameters gt Press the Select button to access the Converge Menu Scroll to the parameter you want to adjust using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to select the parameter The parameter will stop flashing when selected Select the value for the parameter using the Menu Dial Press the Select button to save the parameter value To discard the change and return to the previous menu press the Esc button NOTE Use the Console software in Configuration Mode for advanced configuration tasks LCD Menu Tree Channels Settings Macros Presets Mics RS 232 L Macros L Presets Inputs Network 1 255 1 32 Outputs DID Process Default Faders Contrast Telco Tx Telco Rx Pwr Amp 33 As shown above the main menus on the LCD display are Channels Settings Macros Presets 34 LCD Default Display When you power up a Converge Converge Pro unit the LCD display reads
321. utput Microphone 8 Gate Status 25 NA NA Ground 283 Converge Pro TH20 Port A Female DB 25 Control Status 1 Y Control Input Telco On 2 Y Status Output Telco On Indicator 3 Y Control Input Telco Off 4 X Status Output Telco off indicator 5 Y Control Input 6 Y Status Output 7 Y Control Input 8 Y Status Output 9 Y Control Input Transmit Mute 10 Y Status Output Transmit Mute status 11 Y Control Input Receive Mute 12 Y Status Output Receive mute status 13 Control Input 14 Status Output 15 Ne Control Input 16 Y Status Output 17 Status Output 18 Y Status Output 19 Y Status Output 20 Y Status Output 21 Y Status Output 22 Y Status Output 29 Y Status Output 24 Y Status Output Ring Indication 25 NA NA Ground 284 Converge SR 1212 Port A Female DB 25 User Definable Control Status Default Description Control Input 1 Y 2 Y Status Output 8 Y Control Input Mute All Mics Toggle 4 Y Status Output Status of Mute All Mics 5 Y Control Input Mute Output 9 Toggle 6 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 9 7 Y Control Input Mute Output 10 Toggle 8 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 10 9 Y Control Input Mute Output 11 Toggle 10 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 11 11 Y Control Input Mute Output 12 Toggle 12 Y Status Output Status of Mute Output 12 15 Vf Contr
322. verge mdo When upgrading firmware all units in the site are automatically updated simultaneously NOTE Before upgrading firmware save a copy of your site files using the Save or Save As options on the File menu When upgrading from Converge Console 1 0 4 or 1 1 5 to 2 0 x the Firmware must be updated twice To load firmware click on the Services menu select Firmware Loader The Converge Firmware Loader window appears as shown below Converge Firmware Loader Select Firmware File Firmware File C Program Files ClearOne Converge Console Firmware Converge mdo Firmware File Version 0 0 45 Date 03 06 2007 Name Type Device D versn Unload 30 converges40T 03 Cancel Upload Firmware Close Upload Firmware Loader automatically looks for firmware files in the default Converge Console directory Press the button to locate firmware files stored in a different directory or enter an explicit file path into the Firmware File entry field All available firmware files in the chosen directory are displayed in the firmware file table Once you have located the firmware file you want to load select it from the firmware file table and click Upload Firmware warning dialog appears shown below Click Yes to proceed with the firmware upload Warning Uploading the firmware will cause all of the units to be upgraded and then rebooted Do you want to continue The upload begins and the Firmw
323. vice Type or Device ID fields the command will apply to all units or all devices respectively For example a command with a Device Type 1 and a Device ID would apply the command to all Converge 880 units A command with a Device Type and a Device ID 6 would apply the command to all units with a Device ID of 6 218 If a command specifies Null to query in text in its Value table leave a blank in the command line to query the current state of that value For example the command 12 MUTE 5 M lt blank gt would return the current mute state of Mic 2 on an 880 unit with a Device ID of 0 GROUPS AND CHANNELS All serial commands use common alpha and numeric designators to reference channel groups channel types and other command values Also different channel groups have different allowable channel ranges as shown in the following table Unknown Inputs Outputs Mic Input Amplifier Output Gating Group Processing Expansion Bus Audio Channels Line Inputs Expansion Bus Reference Channels Unit GPIO atrix Fader Presets Macros Transmit Receive Dictionary Phonebook Virtual Reference Timed Events Web PA Virtual Reference EX OU E 3E E gt lt UJ O 219 Pro 880 Channel REINO N A H2 1 8 N A 1 4 A F 1 8 O Z I N 9 12 55 1 LOG 2 Site Wide REWOG N A 1 2 1 2 N A N A N A N A O Z I N 1 2 1 8 LOG 2
324. w clearone com support registration pbhp content main Registering your Converge Pro product s enables ClearOne to provide you with better technical assistance and to notify you of important information regarding your Converge Pro product including available upgrades technical bulletins and new product information WARRANTY INFORMATION ClearOne Communications Inc warrants that this Converge Pro product is free of defects in both material and workmanship For complete warranty information including length coverage and limitations visit http www clearone com support warranty php content main 13 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS Power Converge Pro devices automatically accommodate voltages of 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 15 W Telephone Converge Pro devices operate on a standard analog telephone line and connect to the telephone system with standard RJ 11 modular jack If you do not have an RJ 11 jack where you want to install your Converge Pro call your local telephone company for installation Converge Pro 840T 880T 880TA and TH20 can be configured to meet compliance requirements of different countries via the Console software WARNING The country code must be set correctly in Console to ensure that the unit operates properly when connected to the telco network and that it complies with the country s telco requirements Changing this code to a country other than the intended country of operation might cause Converge Pro devices to be
325. will gate off The default is Off PA Adaptive Mode Uses the audio level on a specified output as the new ambient level when audio is present at the power amplifier This prevents loudspeaker audio from gating on the mic while still allowing people in the room to gate on microphones when they speak provided that their voices are louder than the loudspeaker audio For example you might decide to play background music from a CD player during a presentation PA Adaptive Mode allows you to use the output routed from the CD player as the ambient reference to prevent the CD player s audio from gating on microphones The default is on PA Adapt and AEC Reference When PA Adaptive Mode is selected you must define the output that will be used as the reference source for PA adaptation and Acoustic Echo Cancellation AEC Select a source in the PA Adapt and AEC Reference drop down list You can use any one of the outputs expansion bus references virtual references or speaker output channels as the reference Gate Settings Manual Gating The lower section of the Gate Settings section of the screen contains gating configuration controls for Manual Gating as shown below Manual Gating Settings Processing AUC 030sec Hold Time 120d8 Off Attenuation Chairman Override Manus Off Bu Medium 94 Manual Gating Manual On Manual Off Select the Manual On radio button to gate the channel on or Manual Off to gate the channel off Off gating
326. xer unit of this equipment contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ 7 ZTXXXX If requested this information must be provided to your telephone company The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs contact the telephone company to obtain the maximum RENS for the calling area The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQZ ZTXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modi
327. xt TIMELOCALE Time Locale Settings This command sets or reports the time locale settings Command Form DEVICE TIMELOCALE DaylightSavings TimeZone TimeZoneName Argument Type Size Values Units Daylight Savings Unsigned Integer 4 0 Do not use Daylight Savings 1 Use Daylight Savings NULL to Query in Text Time Zone Unsigned Integer 4 The number of seconds from UDT 86400 86400 Time Zone String 32 Description of time zone Argument TOUT Time Out Select This command selects reports the inactivity time out before returning to the unit title screen on the front panel Command Form DEVICE TOUT Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value Unsigned Integer 4 0 No Time Out Min 1 15 Null to query in text UID Unit ID This command reports the unit id This command is read only Command Form DEVICE UID Value 272 Argument Type Size Values Units Value Hexadecimal 4 Sent with a Null value returned in text VER Version This command reports the version of the unit This command is read only Command Form DEVICE VER Value Argument Type Size Values Units Value String 8 Version of format MM mm rr Sent with a Null in text value returned XCGROUP Compressor Group This command sets the compressor group for synchronized operation of the compressor This command can be used to replace the CGROUP command for the P group Command Form DEVICE XCGROUP lt Channel gt Group Value Argument
328. z in 1Hz increments The default is 1KHz Gain Available for PEQ filters only Use the Gain selector box to set the gain value for the filter you are configuring Range is from 15 to 15dB The default is Q Available for Notch and PEQ filters only Use the Q Quality Factor selector box to select the ratio of the center frequency divided by the bandwidth Q is the inverse of bandwidth and the two parameters are linked Therefore changing the Q value also changes the bandwidth value Range is from 18 to 28 85 Bandwidth Available for Notch and PEQ filters only Use the Bandwidth selector box to set the difference between the upper and lower points of a filter s audio passband Bandwidth is the inverse of Q and the two parameters are linked Hence changing the bandwidth value also changes the Q value The range is 05 to 5 00 octaves Bypass Available for all filter types Use the Bypass checkbox to bypass the currently selected active filter This feature allows you to configure different filters and save them for future use without having to recreate them 88 Press the Phase button to display the phase relationship of the graphed frequency response appears as a grey line on the active filter graph The phase scale appears on the right vertical axis of the graph Channel Property Configuration input 1 Press the Bypass All button to bypass all filters for the selected input channel The filters are grayed out

ClearOne 8I User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents